Sei sulla pagina 1di 172

Lecture Guide Contents

Digital Communications

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

CME 624

May 2016
x (t )

Sampler

x (n)

Quantizer

x(n)

fs 2 B

xk

L 2k

x k

BPSK
QAM, QPSK
OQPSK
MSK
CPFSK - optimal detection
QPR
M-ary PSK
APK

Low

Module 2: Source Encoding & Decoding


Elements of Digital Communication System
Formatting of Analog Information
Sampling, Quantization and Coding
Compounding and Encoding
Speech & Image Coding Techniques
Line Coding Techniques & Pulse Shaping
Inter Symbol Interference (ISI)

High

Complexity
DQPSK
DPSK
CPFSK -discriminator detection
FSK - noncoherent detection
OOK - envelope detection

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Lecture Guide Contents

Equalization

Module 3: Baseband Communication


Digital Baseband Communication Systems
Digital Transmission & Reception
Techniques
Noise in Communication Systems
Detection of Binary Signal in Gaussian
Noise
Optimum Receivers: Maximum Likelihood
Receiver, Matched Filtering, Correlation
Receiver
Correlator
Matched Filter
Coherent & Noncoherent Detection
Probability of Error for Binary Antipodal
Systems

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Module 4: Bandpass Communication


Modulation and Demodulation
Why Modulate?, Modulation categories
Basic Binary Modulation Schemes: BPSK,
BFSK, BPSK
Others Modulation Schemes: DPSK,
QPSK, OQPSK, M_ary Signaling
Comparisons of Digital Modulation
Schemes
Detection of Binary Signals
Error Performance (Bit and Symbol Error)

Module 6: Spread Spectrum


What is Spread Spectrum?/Significance of
Spreading
Basic Characteristics of SS System
Classifications of Spread Spectrum
Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum
Summary of Direct Sequence Techniques
Frequency Hopped Spread Spectrum
Direct Sequence vs. Frequency Hopping

Module 1
Introduction and Overview

Module 5: Multiplexing and Multiple Access


Multiplexing techniques
Frequency-Division Multiplexing
Time-Division Multiplexing
Code-Division Multiplexing
Multiple Access
Frequency Division Multiple Access
Time Division Multiple Access
Code Division Multiple Access
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Controling ISI

Lecture Guide

Prof. Okechukwu C. Ugweje


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Module 1: Introduction and Overview


Course Introduction
Review of linear systems
Review of Random Variables
Review of Random Processes:
Autocorrelation, Cross-correlation, Power
spectral density, Energy Spectral Density
Overview of digital communication systems
Why digital communication?, Goals in
communication system design, Digital
signal nomenclature

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Review of Linear Systems (Signals and Systems)


Review of Probability and Random Signals

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Digital Communication System

Digital Communication System


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Note:
Some of the material contained in Module 1 is a review
of prerequisite materials covered in undergraduate
classes such as:
Signals and Systems
Communications and Signal Processing
Random Signals and Processes

Introduction and Handout

Some of the materials are included in this section for


your benefit
It is your responsibility to review most of the material in
this Module
Most materials in this section can be found in Chapter
1 and the Appendix of the recommended textbook

Introductions
Course Outline/Syllabus
Course Calendar
Course Overview
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Department of Communications Engineering

Signals are used to convey information


Signals and waveforms (voltage, current and intensity)
are central to communication and signal processing
Signals can be viewed either in time or frequency
domain
A signal is any physical quantity that varies with time,
space, or any other independent variables
Often, the independent variables for most signals is
time
Theoretical signals can be described mathematically,
graphically or in tabular form
Real signals are however difficult to describe, and more
often can be described approximately

Signals and Systems


Signals and Systems
Continuous Convolution
Parsevals theorem
Linear Transform
Fourier Transform Techniques
Concept of Bandwidth/ Filtering
Federal University of Technology, Minna

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Signals - 1

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Signals - 2

Signals - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Mathematically, a signal is defined as a function of one


or more independent variables, e.g.,

Mathematically, a signal is defined as a function of one or


more independent variables, e.g.,
x(t) = 10t
x(t) = 5t2
s(x,y) = 3x + 2xy + 10y2

x(t) = 10t
x(t) = 5t2
s(x,y) = 3x + 2xy + 10y2

Sometimes the functional dependence on the independent


variable is not precisely known, e.g., speech signal
Sometimes a signal is a combination of other signals

Sometimes the functional dependence on the


independent variable is not precisely known, e.g.,
speech signal
Sometimes a signal is a combination of other signals

e.g., sum of sinusoid of different amplitudes, frequency & phase

s (t ) Ai (t ) sin 2 Fi (t ) i (t )
n

e.g., sum of sinusoid of different amplitudes,


frequency & phase

i 1

Signals are the inputs outputs, and internal functions that


the systems process or produce, such as voltage,
current, pressure, displacements, intensity, etc.

s (t ) Ai (t ) sin 2 Fi (t ) i (t )
n

i 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Signals - 4

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Signals - 5

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

The variable time may be continuous or discrete and the


value of the signal may be represented as

Physical realizable signals must


Have time duration
Occupy finite frequency spectrum
Are continuous (as in analog signal)
Have finite peak value, and
Are real-valued

Continuous-valued x(t)
Discrete-valued x(nts)
Quantized xQ(t), and
Digital x[n]

All real-world signals will have these properties


Sometimes we use mathematical signal models which violate
these conditions
e.g., Dirac delta function (or impulse function)
The most commonly used analog signals are the sinusoidal
signals (sine, cosine, etc.)
In communication systems, we are concerned with info
bearing signals that evolve as a function of the independent
variable, t

These types of signals occur at different stages of the


process

Other variables (distance, angle, etc.) can also be the


independent variable, especially for 2-D signals like
images and video
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

10

11

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

12

Systems - 1

Systems - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

When signals are corrupted by noise, they no longer convey


the required information directly, hence they often require
processing
Radio receivers are especially sensitive to noise
Signals are processed by systems, which may modify them
or extract additional information from them
Thus, a system is an entity that processes a set of signals
(inputs) to yield another set of signals (outputs)
A system can also be associated to the signal as in the
source or sink of the signal
A system may be made up of physical components
(hardware realization), as in electrical, mechanical, or
hydraulic systems, or it may be an algorithm (software
realization) that computes an output from an input signal

Many systems have signals that are not wanted (commonly


known as noise or interference)
A system is a device, process, or algorithm that, given an
input x(t), produces an output y(t)
A system is characterized by its input (excitation or forcing
function), its output (response), and the rules of operation
(internal functions)
From a communication engineers viewpoint, a system is a law
that assigns output signals to various input signals
Systems may be realized as an integration of sub-systems or
as a single entity
In practice, systems with feedback is of great importance

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

13

Systems - 3

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Systems - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Systems may be classified functionally as in

To understand the behavior of systems


(electronic/mechanical), the response to inputs
(usually signals) must be understood

Analyzers, Synthesizers, Transducers, Channels,


Filters, and Equalizers, etc.

or descriptively as in

Terminology of Systems
State:

linear, nonlinear, causal, discrete, continues, time


invariant, etc.

Variables that allow us to determine the energy level


of the system
All physical systems are referenced to zero-energy
state, e.g., ground state, rest state, relaxed state

Examples of Systems
Electronic systems: resistors, inductors, Radio/TV,
phone networks, sonar and radar, guidance &
navigation, satellite, lab instrumentation, biomedical
instrumentation, etc.
Mechanical systems: loudspeakers, microphones,
vibration analyzers, springs, dampers
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

14

Initial Conditions
The initial conditions or initial state is the state of the
system before an input is applied
15

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

16

Systems - 5

Systems - 6

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Broad Classification of Systems

Operation on Linear Systems


An operator, T, is a rule to transform one function to another
Additive

SYSTEMS

Distributed
Parameters

We are
interested only
on the systems
that intersect the
dotted path.

Lumped Parameters

Stochastic

Deterministic

Linear

Time
Varying

Nonlinear

Time
Invariant

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Principle of Superposition
Superposition implies both additive & homogeneous rules

k p

k p

If a system fails either rule, the function is nonlinear


Addition or homogeneity is sufficient condition to test for
linearity

Time
Invariant

17

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

18

Why study signals and systems?

Linear Time-Invariant (LTI) Systems


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

In signals and systems theory we study the definition


and description of signals, and the behavior of systems
under different conditions
Signals form the inputs, outputs and internal
functions of systems
In electrical & computer engineering, the understanding
of signals and the behavior of systems is of immense
importance
Communication engineers are concerned with systems
which transmit, receive, and process signals carrying
information
Hence before one can characterize a system, one must
be able to characterize the system

LTI
x(t)

h(t)

y(t)

x[n]

h[n]

y[n]

x(ejw)

H(ejw)

Y(ejw)

X(f)

H(f)

Y(f)

H(z)

Y(z)

Time Function
Frequency Function
Difference Equation
Pole-Zero Plot
H - Function

Linear systems are characterized by the ability to accept


input and produce output in response to the input
Most communication systems can be modeled as linear
systems with signals forming the input and output functions
Prof. Okey Ugweje

T Ax1(t ) Bx2 (t ) AT x1(t ) BT x2 (t )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

X(z)

T x(t ) y(t )

T Kx(t ) KT x(t )

Linear

Time
Varying

p k p k p

Homogeneous

Discrete Time

Continuous Time

Nonlinear

T x1(t ) x2 (t ) T x1(t ) T x2 (t )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

19

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

20

Size of a Signal - 1

Size of a Signal - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

The size of a signal is the value of the strength of the


signal
The signal strength may be measures in its entirety
or in a given interval
Such a measure must consider not only the signal
amplitude, but also its duration
There are two major ways of determining the signal
strength

1. Signal Energy

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

21

A signal is classified as energy-type if its energy Eg is


finite (0<Eg<)
Energy may be computed in either time or frequency
domain, whichever is easier using the following
formula

Eg g (t ) dt

T /2
lim
T T / 2

g (t ) dt G ( f ) df

(unit)2s

where G(f) is the Fourier transform of g(t)


All time-limited signals of finite amplitude are energy
signals
Energy signals have zero power
Since signal energy also depends on the load the actual
signal energy should be normalized by the load R

Size of a Signal - 3

Federal University of Technology, Minna

22

Signals and Spectra - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

2. Signal Power

Important Signal Classifications


Deterministic and Random Signals
Value of the signal is known or not known at all
times
Periodic and Non-periodic Signals

A signal is power-type if its power Pg is finite (0<Pg<)


The power Pg of a signal can be computed using the
formula
2

Pg Tlim 21T TT g (t ) dt Tlim T1 TT/ 2/ 2 g (t ) dt (unit)2

x(t ) x(t T0 ), t

Notice that the signal power is the time-average


(mean) of the signal amplitude squared
Most periodic signals are power-type signals
For periodic signals Eg & Pg can be computed by
integrating over one period

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Analog (Continuous-Time) and Discrete Signals


Exists for all times t vs. exists at discrete time
only

23

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

24

Signals and Spectra - 2

Signals and Spectra - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Energy- and Power-Type Signals

ExT .5T x 2 (t )dt


.5T

PxT

1
T

ExT

1
T

Others
Even and Odd Signals
Real and Complex Signals
Causal and Noncausal

.5T

2
.5T x (t )dt

with waveform

EX
Px

.5T

lim .5T

1
T T
lim

x 2 (t )dt x 2 (t )dt
1

2
2
.5T x (t )dt T x (t )dt
.5T

Unit Impulse Function

(t )dt 1,

(t ) 0 for t 0

x(t ) ( to )d x(t0 )
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

25

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Signals and Spectra - 4

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Examples

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Spectral Density

1. Example 1
Signal Power

Energy Spectral Density

26

E X x 2 (t )dt x( f ) df Parseval ' s Theorem

X ( f )

2. Example 2
Signal Energy

X ( f )df ( f ) is defined as energy spectral density

2 0 X ( f )df

Power Spectral Density

3. Example 3
Signal Energy

1
2
Cn power
x (t )dt n
T
For periodic signals, the PSD is given by

PX

T
2
T
2

GX ( f )
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Cn f nf 0

Federal University of Technology, Minna

27

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

28

Signals and Spectra - 6

Signals and Spectra - 7

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Some Important or Common Signals & Functions


Sinusoidal Signal
Complex Exponential (harmonics)
Unit Step Function [denoted by u(t)]
Ramp Function [denoted by r(t)]
Rectangular Pulse Function [denoted by rect(t) or
(t)]
Triangular Pulse Function[denoted by (t)]
Sign (Signum) Function [denoted by sgn(t)]
Sinc Function [denoted by sinc(t)]
Impulse (Delta, Dirac) Function [denoted by (t)]

Operations on Signals
Amplitude Scaling
Amplitude Shifting
Time Shifting
Displaces a signal in time without changing its
shape

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

y (t ) x(t )
"+"shifts the signal left by
"-" shifts the signal right by (delayed)

29

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Signals and Spectra - 8

30

Signals and Spectra - 9

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Time Scaling

Some useful signal operations and models

Slows down or speeds up time which results in signal


compression or stretching
The expression
t
y (t ) x

Continuous/Discrete Convolution
Parsevals theorem
Hilbert Transform

Concept of Bandwidth and Filtering

Reflection or Folding

Some Important Properties of Signals

A scaling operation with = -1 x(t) = x(-t)


The mirror image of x(t) about the y-axis through t = 0

DC Value
Is the time average of a signal or the time average
over a finite interval [t1, t2]

Operations in Combinations
x(t) delay (shift right) by x(t-)
compress by x(t-)
x(t) compress by x(t)
delay (shift right) by / x(t-)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Average Power
The ensemble average

RMS Value
31

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

32

Examples

Signals and Spectra - 10


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Fourier Series and Transform

4. Example 4
Periodicity of Signal

Definition and Properties


Important Fourier transform cases
Energy and power spectral density

g (t ) g t T0

5. Example 5
Even and Odd Signals

Different Types of Sampling Techniques


Idea Sampling
Natural Sampling
Sample-and-Hold

Even x(t) = x(-t)


Odd x(t) = -x(-t)

6. Example 6
Even and Odd Signals
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

33

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Examples

Federal University of Technology, Minna

34

Fourier Transform Table

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

7. Example 7 : Convolution
Convolution is a technique of finding the zero state
response of LTI system
x(t)

y (t ) x(t ) h(t )

h(t)

y(t)

x( )h(t )d x(t )h( )d

8. Example 8: Convolution

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

35

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

36

Examples

Fourier Transform Pair


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

9. Example 9: Fourier Transform


X ( f ) F x(t )

z x(t)e j2ft dt

10.Example 10: Fourier Transform


11.Example 11: Fourier Transform
12.Example 12: Fourier Transform
13.Example 13: Inverse Fourier Transform
x(t ) F 1 X ( f )

z X ( f )e j2ftdf

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

37

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

38

Examples Random Signals

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

14. Example 14
Random Signals

15. Example 15

Review of Probability and


Random Signals
Probability Theory
Distribution Functions
Density Functions
Expectations
Random Processes, etc
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Random Processes

Please review the course


CME621:Stochastic
Processes

Federal University of Technology, Minna

39

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

40

Digital Communication System

Digital Communication System


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Module 2
Source Encoding & Decoding

Elements of Digital
Communication System

Elements of Digital Communication


Formatting of Analog Signal
Sampling and Quantization
Compounding
Encoding and Line Coding Techniques
Intersymbol interference
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

41

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Elements of Digital Communication - 1

Federal University of Technology, Minna

42

Elements of Digital Communication - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Digital
input

lm q
i

Format

Source
Encoder

Source
bits

Channel
bits

Channel
Encoder

From other
sources

Multiplex

Modulate

Spread

Multiple
Access

Tx

Pe

Performance
Measure

Bits or
Symbol

Waveforms

Rx

n s
m$i

Format

Source
Decoder
Digital
output

Channel
Decoder
Source
bits

Demultiplex

Channel
bits

Demodulate
&
Detect

To other
destinations

Despread

Multiple
Access

Carrier & symbol


synchronization

Each of these blocks represents one or more transformations


Each block identifies a major signal processing function which changes or
transforms the signal from one signal space to another
Some of the transformation block overlap in functions
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

43

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

44

Why Digital Communications? - 1

Why Digital Communications? - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

1. Advantages

Easier and more efficient to multiplex several digital


signals

Two-state signal representation


Hardware is more flexible
Hardware implementation is flexible and permits the use of
microprocessors, mini-processors, LSI or VLSI, etc.

Low cost
Easy to regenerate the distorted signal

Can use packet switching


Encryption and privacy techniques are easier to
implement
Better overall performance

Repeaters can detect a digital signal and retransmit a new,


clean (noise free) signal
Hence, prevent accumulation of noise along the path

Less subject to distortion and interference


Digital system is more immune to channel noise/ distortion

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Can combine different signal types data, voice,


TV, text, etc.
It is possible to combine both format for transmission
through a common medium

With LSI/VLSI, implementation cost is reduced

Digital multiplexing techniques TDMA and CDMA - are


easier to implement than analog techniques such as FDMA

45

Why Digital Communications? - 3

Inherently more efficient than analog techniques in


realizing the exchange of SNR for bandwidth
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

46

Goals in Communication System Design

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

2. Disadvantages

To maximize transmission rate, R, e.g., symbols per sec


To minimize bit error rate, Pe, or Pb
To minimize required power, Eb/No (or ~ly required signal
power)
To minimize required systems bandwidth, W
To maximize system utilization, U
To minimize system complexity, Cx

Requires reliable synchronization


Requires A/D conversions at high data rate
Requires larger bandwidth (require BW efficient
MODEM)
Banalog = W Hz
Bdigital = nW Hz

where n is the # of bits used to quantize the amplitude


of the signal

Generally an increase in complexity over analog


system

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

In most practical
applications tradeoffs are necessary

47

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Pe

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Cx Eb/No

48

Digital Signal Nomenclature - 1

Digital Signal Nomenclature - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Information Source
Discrete output values, e.g. Keyboard (1~26 (A~Z) symbols)

Symbol

Analog signal source information is continuous valued


Textual Message
A meaningful sequence of character or symbols, e.g.,

Digital Message
Messages constructed from a finite # of symbols (26 letters, 10
numbers, space and punctuation marks).

How are you? I am ok, thank you; I feel like a million dollars!

Character
Member of an alphanumeric/symbol (A ~ Z, 0 ~ 9)
Characters can be mapped into a sequence of binary digits
using one of the standardized codes such as
ASCII: American Standard Code for Information
Interchange
Others: EBCDIC, Hollerith, Baudot, Murray, Morse, etc.
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

A digital message made up of groups of k-bits considered as a unit


A member of source alphabet. May or may not be binary, e.g. 2
symbol binary, 4 symbol PSK, 128 symbol ASCII

Hence a text is a digital message with about 50 symbols

Morse-coded telegraph message is a digital message


constructed from 2 symbols Mark and Space
M_ary
A digital message constructed with M symbols
Digital Waveform
Current or voltage waveform that represents a digital symbol
49

Digital Signal Nomenclature - 3

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Digital Signal Nomenclature - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Binary Digit (Bit)


Fundamental unit of info made up of 2 symbols (0 and 1)
Quantity of info carried by a symbol with probability P =
Bit: number with value 0 or 1
n bits: digital representation for 0, 1, , 2n
Byte or Octet, n = 8
Computer word, n = 16, 32, or 64
n bits allows enumeration of 2n possibilities
n-bit field in a header
n-bit representation of a voice sample
Message consisting of n bits
The number of bits required to represent a message is a measure
of its information content
More bits More content

Binary Stream (or bit stream or baseband signal)


A sequence of binary digits, e.g., 10011100101010
Block
Stream
Information that occurs in
Information that is
a single block
produced & transmitted
Text message
continuously

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

50

51

Data file
JPEG image
MPEG file

Real-time voice
Streaming video

Size = Bits / block


or bytes/block

Bit rate = bits / second

1 kbyte = 210 bytes


1 Mbyte = 220 bytes
1 Gbyte = 230 bytes

1 kbps = 103 bps


1 Mbps = 106 bps
1 Gbps =109 bps

Federal University of Technology, Minna

52

Digital Signal Nomenclature - 5

Digital Signal Nomenclature - 6

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Examples of Block Information

Transmission Delay

Type

Method

Format

Original

Compressed
(Ratio)

Text

Zip,
compress

ASCII

KbytesMbytes

(2-6)

Fax

CCITT
Group 3

A4 page
200x100
pixels/in2

256
kbytes

5-54 kbytes
(5-50)

JPEG

in2

38.4
Mbytes

Color
Image

Prof. Okey Ugweje

8x10
photo
2
400 pixels/in2

number of bits in message


speed of digital transmission system
time to transmit the information
time for signal to propagate across medium
distance in meters
speed of light (3x108 m/s in vacuum)

L
R bps
L/R
tprop
d
c

Delay = tprop + L/R = d/c + L/R seconds

1-8 Mbytes
(5-30)

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Use data compression to reduce L


Use higher speed modem to increase R
Place server closer to reduce d
53

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

54

Bit Rate of Digitized Signal

Digital Signal Nomenclature - 7


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Bit Rate

Bandwidth Ws Hertz: how fast the signal changes


Higher bandwidth more frequent samples
Minimum sampling rate = 2 x Ws

Actual rate at which info is transmitted per second

Baud Rate
The rate at which bits are transmitted, i.e. # of signaling elements per
second

Representation accuracy: range of approximation error

Bit Error Rate

Higher accuracy
smaller spacing between approximation values
more bits per sample

The probability that one bit is in error, Pb, or simply the probability of
error, Pe

Data Rate
The rate at which info is transferred in bits per second
If binary symbols are independent & equiprobable, the bit rate = baud
rate

Character Rate
Characters transmitted per second
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

55

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

56

Stream Information

Sampling Rate and Bandwidth

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

A signal that varies faster needs to be sampled more


frequently
Bandwidth measures how fast a signal varies

A real-time voice signal must be digitized &


transmitted as it is produced
Analog signal level varies continuously in time

x1(t)

10 10 1 0 1 0

...

x2(t)

11 1 1 0 000

...

...

...

1 ms

1 ms
Th e s p ee

ch s i g n al l e v el

v a r ie s w i th

m(e)

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

57

Bandwidth of General Signals

What is the bandwidth of a signal?


How is bandwidth related to sampling rate?

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Department of Communications Engineering

speech

(noisy )

Analog

|p

(air stopped)

| ee

(periodic)

Not all signals are periodic


E.g. voice signals varies according X(f)
to sound
Vowels are periodic, s is noiselike
Spectrum of long-term signal
Averages over many sounds, many
speakers
Involves Fourier transform
0
Telephone speech: 4 kHz
CD Audio: 22 kHz

| t (stopped) | sh (noisy)

Digital

Older technology

Newer technology

Used to design mainly for voice

Used to design for data and voice

Inefficient for data

Efficient for data

Noisy and error prone

Noise can be easily filtered out

Lower speeds

Higher speeds

High overhead

Low overhead

Info is precise since recorded,


transmitted or displayed
continuously in time

Digital is accurate since info is displayed in


terms of values; but we don't know if the
precise value is displayed

Interpretation of display is harder

Interpretation of display is easier


More test options

Ws

Discrete-level information
Performance measured with SNR

Prof. Okey Ugweje

58

Analog vs. Digital Communications

Department of Communications Engineering

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Federal University of Technology, Minna

59

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Performance measured with BER

Federal University of Technology, Minna

60

Analog vs. Digital Transmission

Bandwidth Dilemma

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Analog transmission: all details must be reproduced accurately

All bandwidth criteria have in common the attempt to


specify a measure of the width, W, of a nonnegative
real-valued spectral density defined for all frequencies
f <

Distortion
Attenuation Received

Sent

The single-sided power spectral density for a single


heterodyned pulse xc(t) takes the analytical form:

Digital transmission: only discrete levels need to be reproduced


Sent

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Distortion
Attenuation

Received

sin ( f f c )T
Gx ( f ) T

( f f c )T

Simple Receiver:
Was original pulse
positive or
negative?

Federal University of Technology, Minna

61

Different Bandwidth Criteria

Prof. Okey Ugweje

(1.73)

Federal University of Technology, Minna

62

Digital Communication Transformations

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

(a) Half-power
bandwidth.
(b) Equivalent
rectangular or noise
equivalent bandwidth.
(c) Null-to-null bandwidth.
(d) Fractional power
containment
bandwidth.
(e) Bounded power
spectral density.
(f) Absolute bandwidth.

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

63

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

64

Encoding and Decoding of Messages

Digital Communication System


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

(Baseband Systems)
Source bits

Formatting of Analog
Signal

lm q
i

Pe

Baseband Systems
Formatting Textual Data (messages, character, symbols)
Formatting Analog Information
Sampling (see prerequisite section)
Quantization
Line Coding
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

65

Digital Communication Transformations - 1

Source
Encoder

Format

From other
sources
Channel bits

Channel
Encoder

Multiplex

Pulse
Modulation

Modulate

Spread

Multiple
Access

Digital
input
Performance
Measure

lm q
i

Bits or
Symbol

Waveforms

Digital
output

Format

Source
Decoder

Channel
Decoder

Source bits

Demultiplex

Demodulate &
Detect

Multiple
Access

Channel bits
To other
destinations

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Despread

Carrier and symbol


synchronization

Federal University of Technology, Minna

66

Digital Communication Transformations - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Transmit and Receive Formatting


Transition from info source digital symbols info sink
Digital Information

Source

Textual
Information
Analog
Information

Analog
Information

Sink

Sampler

Quantizer

Waveform
Encoder
(Modulator)

Coder

Channel

Format
LPF

Decoder

Textual
Information

Transmitter

Waveform
Detector

Receiver

Digital Information

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

67

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

68

Digital Communication Transformations - 3

Digital Communication Transformations - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Character Coding (Textual Info)

Character coding, messages and symbols

A textual info is a sequence of alphanumeric characters


Characters are encoded into bits
Groups of k bits can be combined to form new digits or
symbols of size M
Textual
Message

Encoder

... 01101 ...

Group of k bits
M=2k

M_ary

Waveform
Encoder
(Modulator)

Alphanumeric and symbolic characters are encoded


into digital bits using one of several standard formats
ASCII
EBCDIC
Others Baudot, Hollerith, Morse

M 2k

A symbol set of size M is referred to as M-ary system

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

69

Digital Communication Transformations - 5

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

70

Digital Communication Transformations - 6

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Example 16:
In ASCII alphabets, numbers, and symbols are encoded
using a 7-bit code
7-bit ASCII

Most significant
b8

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

Parity

b1
Least significant

A total of 27 = 128 different characters can be


represented using a 7-bit unique ASCII code
U
7-bit ASCII

16_ary digits
1
(symbols)

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

71

Prof. Okey Ugweje

S
1

Federal University of Technology, Minna

0
C

72

Digital Communication System

Digital Representation of Analog Signals


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Most practical signal of interest are analog in nature


e.g., speech
biological signals
seismic signals
radar signals
sonar, and
various communication signals (audio, video, text, etc)

Sampling

Conversion to digital form is necessary


Analog
Signal

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Interface
(A/D)

Digital
Signal

Federal University of Technology, Minna

73

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Digitization of Analog Signals

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Transmitter Side Encoding

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

(Formatting Analog Information)

1. Sampling: obtain samples of x(t) at uniformly spaced


time intervals
2. Quantization: map each sample into an approximation
value of finite precision
Pulse Code Modulation: telephone speech
CD audio
3. Compression: to lower bit rate further, apply additional
compression method
Differential coding: cellular telephone speech
Subband coding: MP3 audio
Compression discussed in Chapter 12

Structure of Digital Communication Transmitter


Input
Signal

Sampling

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Quantization

Digital
Modulation

Transmitted
Signal

Transmitter

Analog-to-Digital (A/D) Conversion


A/D Converter
Analog Input
Signal

xa(t)

Analog signal

Prof. Okey Ugweje

74

75

Prof. Okey Ugweje

x[n]
Sampler

Quantizer

Discrete-time
signal

xq(n)

Quantized
Output Signal

Quantized
signal

Federal University of Technology, Minna

76

Sampling - 1

Sampling - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

A/D conversion involves a 2 step process:

Illustration of sampling:

Sampling (Review 341 course notes)


Converts CT analog signal x(t) to DT continuous value signal
xs(t)
Continuous
Time Analog
Signal

Sampling

Discrete-time
continuous-valued
signal

Obtained by taking the samples of x(t) at DT intervals, Ts


xs(t) is discrete time signal (but still continuous valued)
Proper sampling must satisfy Nyquist theorem
Sampling does not introduce error or distortion

Quantization
Converts DT continuous valued signal to DT discrete valued
signal
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

77

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Sampling - 3

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Sampling - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Sampling Theorem (section 2.4.1)


Let the signal x(t) be bandlimited @ B (or fm), with
Fourier Transform (or spectrum) X(f)
x(t) can be perfectly reconstructed provided Rs
2B (fs 2fm)
2B is called the Nyquist Rate
If Rs < 2B, aliasing (overlapping of spectra) results
If signal is not strictly bandlimited, then it must be
passed through LPF before sampling

The first step in PCM is sampling.


The analog signal is sampled every Ts sec, where Ts is the
sample interval or period.
The inverse of the sampling interval is the sampling rate or
sampling frequency and denoted by fs, where fs = 1/Ts.

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

78

79

Federal University of Technology, Minna

80

Sampling - 5

Sampling - 6

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

There are 3 sampling methods.


Ideal (or Impulse) Sampling
Natural Sampling
Sample-and-Hold
Practical Sampling
Flat-Top Sampling

Covered in 4400:341
Communications and
Signal Processing

In ideal sampling, pulses from the analog signal are sampled.


This method is ideal and cannot be easily implemented.
In natural sampling, a high-speed switch is turned on for only
the small period of time when the sampling occurs. The result is
a sequence of samples that retains the shape of the analog
signal.
The most common sampling method, called sample and hold,
however, creates flat-top samples by using a circuit.
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

81

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Sampling - 7

Federal University of Technology, Minna

82

Sampling - 8

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Ideal Sampling (or Impulse Sampling)

For all sampling techniques


If fs > 2B then we recover x(t) exactly
If fs < 2B) spectral overlapping known as aliasing
will occur

x (t ) x(t ) x (t )

x(t ) (t nTs) x(nTs) (t nTs)


n
n

Natural Sampling (or Gating)


Note

xs (t ) x(t ) x p (t ) x(t ) cn e j2nf st


n

According to the Nyquist theorem, the


sampling rate must be
at least 2 times the highest frequency
contained in the signal.

Sample-and-Hold
x (t ) x '(t ) p(t )
s

x(t ) (t nT s) p(t )
n

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

83

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

84

Please Note

Examples

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

First, we can sample a signal only if the signal is band-limited. A


signal with an infinite bandwidth cannot be sampled.
Second, the sampling rate must be at least 2 times the highest
frequency, not the bandwidth.
If the analog signal is low-pass, the bandwidth and the highest
frequency are the same value.
If the analog signal is bandpass, the bandwidth value is lower than
the value of the maximum frequency

17.Example 17
Consider the analog signal x(t) given by
x (t ) 3cos 50 t 100sin 300 t cos 100 t
What is the Nyquist rate for this signal?
Can this signal be reconstructed at the receiver at
the Nyquist rate?

18.Examples 18
Sampling

19.Examples 19
Sampling
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

85

Practical Sampling Rates

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

86

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Speech:
Telephone quality speech has a bandwidth of 4 kHz
Most digital telephone systems are sampled at 8000
samples/sec

Quantization & Pulse


Code Modulation

Audio:
The highest frequency the human ear can hear is
approximately 15 kHz
CD quality audio are sampled at rate of 44,000
samples/sec

Video:
The human eye requires samples at a rate of at least
20 frames/sec to achieve smooth motion
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

87

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

88

Quantization - 1

Quantization - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

A/D Converter
Analog
Input
signal

x(t)

Sampler

x[n]

Quantizer

Discrete-time signal

Analog signal

xq(n)

Quantized
output signal

Quantized signal

Sample values require infinite # of bits for perfect


representation since sampler output still continuous in
amplitude
each sample can take on any value, e.g. 4.752, 0.001, etc
the number of possible values is infinite

To transmit as a digital signal we must restrict the # of


possible values to finite bits
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

89

Quantization - 3

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

90

Quantizer Model and Definitions - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

e.g., suppose we must round to the nearest tenth,


then:
4.752 4.8
0.001 0
rounds off the sample values to the nearest
discrete value in a set of L quantum levels
quantized samples xq(n) are discrete in time (by
virtues of sampling) and discrete in amplitude (by
virtue of quantization)
Because we are approximating the analog sample
values by using finite # of levels, L, error is
introduced during quantization
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Definition:
Quantization is the process of approximating
continuous-valued samples with a finite number of
bits
Quantizer
device that operates on a discrete-time signal to
produce finite # of amplitudes by approximating the
sampled values
maps each sampled value to one of pre-assigned
output levels
the process of rounding off a sample according to
some rule

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Quantizer

X[nT]

Xq(nT)

random process

Definition
number, size, location of its quantizing cell
boundaries, and step size of the quantization process

Quantization Resolution
# of bits, n, used to represent each sample

n log 2 L

where L = number of levels

more bits results in better fidelity


However, the bit rate is higher and more bandwidth is required
91

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

92

Quantizer Model and Definitions - 2

Illustration and Description of Quantization - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Telephone systems typically use 8 bits of resolution


64 kbps
CD players use 16 bits of resolution/channel
705.6 kbps (mono)
Quantization error = difference of xs(t) and xq(nT)
Unlike sampling quantization is an irreversible
process
It results in signal distortion

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

93

input
signal

LPF

Sampler

Quantizer

Encoder

Binary
codes

Operational Description
Process of approximating DT continuous valued samples
with a finite # of bits
the process of rounding off a sample according to some
rule maps each sampled value to one of pre-assigned
output levels, L
quantized samples xq(n) are discrete in time and discrete
in amplitude
the approximation introduces errors
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

94

Illustration and Description of Quantization - 2

Illustration and Description of Quantization - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Range over which a quantizer will operate


Vmax, Vmin (Vp, -Vp)

Peak-to-peak voltage range


Vpp = Vp (-Vp) = 2Vp
Dynamic Range

Vmax
Vmin
Vmax
k
Vmax / L L 2

Dynamic Range depends on the


resolution of the converter
min detectable signal variation is
Vmax/L volts =
~ quantization step size, q
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

95

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

96

Illustration and Description of Quantization - 4

Illustration and Description of Quantization - 5

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Mathematically
Xq ( kTs ) mi , if x k 1 x ( kTs ) x k
Xq (t ) Xq ( kTs ), if kTs t ( k 1)Ts

Sampled values are converted to one of L allowable


levels, m1, m2, , mL, according to some desired rule
Output is a sequence of levels, Xq(t)
Improvement can be achieved by careful selection of xi's
and mi's
Let X be a random variable representing a sample of data
Quantizer
+

x f ( x ) x e(t )

e(t ) x x
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

97

Prof. Okey Ugweje

e(t ) x x

Federal University of Technology, Minna

98

Illustration and Description of Quantization - 6

Illustration and Description of Quantization - 7

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Then, the quantized value of X is given by

In Tabular Form In Concise Form


k xk 1
1
3
2
2
3
1
4
5
0
6
1
7
2
8
3

X f ( X )
If a quantizer has L quantization levels

X x1 , x 2 , x3 ,, x L

Then, with the endpoints, we have L+1 values

kx , x , x ,, x p,
0

This implies that


x k 1 x x k
Prof. Okey Ugweje

where x 0 , x L

xk
3
2
1
0
1
2
3

xk
3.5
2.5
15
.
0.5
0.5
15
.
2.5
3.5

{-3.5, -2.5, -1.5, -0.5, 0.5, 1.5, 2.5, 3.5}


Why?
We

assume that all points are


quantized to the nearest
quantization level
This determines the position of the
borders of the quantization regions

X f ( X ) X k

Federal University of Technology, Minna

99

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

100

Illustration and Description of Quantization - 8

Illustration and Description of Quantization - 9

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Transfer Functions

Quantizers input/output characteristics ~ simple staircase


graphs

a f

xq nTs
output
(odd # of levels)
Zero assigned
to a quantization
level

Graphical representation
of the input and output
characteristics of the
quantizer

MIDRISER

MIDTREAD

y7

output

y6

(even # of levels)

x2

input

x4
y3

Zero assigned
to a decision level

y6
y5

y5
x3

x1

a f

xq nTs

x5

x6

a f

x1

x2 x
3

x nTs

input

y3 x4

x5

a f

x nTs

y2

y2

y1

y1

Biased
(Truncation)

Nonuniform
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

101

Classification of Quantizers - 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Biased

Federal University of Technology, Minna

102

Classification of Quantizers - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Uniform (linear) vs. Nonuniform


Uniform => equally spaced quantization levels
Nonuniform => levels not equally spaced

Differential Pulse-Code Modulation (DPCM)


quantizes the prediction error rather than the actual
signal samples
uses a linear prediction filter

Scalar vs. Vector


Scalar => operates on each output separately
Vector => works on several samples at a time
Many signals exhibit strong correlation between samples
This implies that RX(t) RX(t + TS)
e,.g., in speech correlation b/w adjacent samples =0.9
quantizing 2 or more samples at a time exploits this
correlation
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

103

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

104

Classification of Quantizers - 3

Uniform Quantizer (UQ) - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Adaptive DPCM (ADPCM)

A uniform quantizer is a quantizer for which


xk 1 xk q, k 0,1, ..., L 1
Has equal quantization levels
Each sample is approximated within a quantile interval
Optimal when the input pdf is uniform

allows the spacing between quantization levels to be


changed on the fly
used to avoid slope overload

Delta modulation

i.e. all values within the range are equally likely

1-bit DPCM

1
q

Vocoding (Voice Coding)


Transmits a mathematical model of a set of samples
rather than actual samples

q
2

q
2

Most ADCs are implemented using UQ


Error of a UQ is bounded by q e q
2

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

105

Uniform Quantizer (UQ) - 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

106

Nonuniform Quantizer (NQ) - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Uniform Quantization Transfer function

NQ have unequally spaced levels


spacing chosen to optimize the SNR

Output
signal

Characterized by:

Xq(t)

Variable step size


Quantizer step size depend on signal pdf

4
2

Input signal

-2
-8 -6 -4

8 X(t)

-2

2V p

Basic principle ~ use variable level sizes at regions


with variable pdf

concentrate q-levels in areas of largest pdf


use small (large) step size for weak (strong) signals

-4
-6

Uniform 3 bit Quantizer


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

107

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

108

Nonuniform Quantizer (NQ) - 2

Nonuniform Quantizer (NQ) - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Advantages:
NQ yields a higher average SNR than UQ when the
pdf is nonuniform which is usually the case in
practice
X

XX X X X X X X

The rms value of

Output signal
Xq(t)

Practically, NQ is realized by

sample compression followed


by UQ
Compression transforms the
input variable X to another
variable Y using a nonlinear
transformation
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Input signal
X(t)

Federal University of Technology, Minna

109

Mathematical Description of Quantizer - 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

110

Mathematical Description of Quantizer - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Quantization adds random noise to the true value of


the sample
Process can be interpreted as an additive noise process
x t

the noise power is


proportional to the
sampled values
hence distortion is
minimized

Quantizer
+

x t f ( x) x t e(t )

The variance corresponds to the average quantization


noise power, i.e.,

( x x ) 2 f X ( x)dx
2 E x x 2

See eqn. 13.13

In NQ, we wish to make x x small when fX(x) is large


We can accept larger x x 2 when fX(x) is small
Want to minimize average noise variance
MSE penalizes large errors more than small errors
2

e(t ) x t x t

Let the quantizer error variance be

2
( x x) 2 f X ( x)dx ( x x ) 2 f X ( x)dx

where fX(x) is the probability density function


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

111

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

112

Mathematical Description of Quantizer - 3

Mathematical Description of Quantizer - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Signal-to-quantization noise ratio (SQNR) (or


simply SNR)
From above equation, average SNR can be written as

We have assumed
1. e(t) is uniformly distributed
2. {e(t)} is a stationary white noise process, i.e. e(j)
and e(k) are uncorrelated for j = k
3. e(t) is uncorrelated with the input signal x(t), and
4. signal sample xs(t) is zero mean and stationary

Signal Power
S

Noise Power
N avg

E {x 2 }

E e(t )

As a rule of thumb, each bit of quantization increases


the SNR by 6 dB provided that
a) xs(t) has a uniform distribution, and
b) the quantizer is a uniform quantizer

2
E {x 2 }
E {x 2 }
x f X ( x)dx


2
2
D
E x x ( x x ) f X ( x)dx

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

113

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

SNR for Uniform Quantizer - 1

Mathematical Description of Quantizer - 5


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

If the input signal is a sequence, then

Given

1 N 1 2
PS
xs [ n ]
N n 0

N 1

q = step size, max quantization error is q

Signal power

1 N 1 2
PN
e [ n]
N n 0

Noise power

x [ n]
PS n
0

SNR
PN N1 e 2 [n]

L 1

V pp
L

2 2 q (error ) 2 p (e)de 2 q (e) 2 1q de 1q 2 q (e) 2 de


2

Signal-to-noise ratio

q
3 2

q2
1e

q 3 q 12
2

n 0

L/2 1 positive levels


L/2 1 negative levels
1 zero level
Prof. Okey Ugweje

V pp

where L = 2n is the # of quantization levels


The noise variance of the quantization error is given by
q

2
s

114

Federal University of Technology, Minna

115

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Equation 13.12
L 1 level
L 2 intervals

Federal University of Technology, Minna

This is the MSE


(noise variance)
116

SNR for Uniform Quantizer - 2

SNR for Uniform Quantizer n- 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Given

For UQ with nonuniform inputs use the formula

FH S IK E{x 2}2
N avg
E l x x q

q = step size
max quantization error is

V pp
L 1

V pp

Therefore, if a quantizer is (a) uniform with L levels,


(b) input is uniform pdf, then SNR is

Ppeak signal V pp2 12 2


S
SNR

L

Paverage q V pp2 4
N avg

2n

where L = is the # of quantization levels


Peak signal power
V pp

Ppeak signal

D = 2 = MSE

3L

See eqn. 2.20

This is the peak signal power to the average


quantization error power

Assuming Vpp is peak power


centered around zero (Vpp/2)

Average quantization noise power


2

Paverage

V pp
q2
2
12 L 12

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

117

SNR for Uniform Quantizer - 4

Therefore the SNR is

V pp

Ppeak signal V pp2 4 2


S
SNR
2 L L2

V pp 4
Ppeak q
N peak

Hence, there are two SNRs: Peak-to-Average and


Peak-to-Peak

For the peak, since L = 2n, SNR = 22n or in decibels

Peak quantization noise power


The quantization error is at worst half the
distance between quantization levels
The power of this error is therefore

Prof. Okey Ugweje

118

Department of Communications Engineering

We can also find the peak signal power to the peak


quantization error power
Peak signal power

Ppeak q

Federal University of Technology, Minna

SNR for Uniform Quantizer - 5

Department of Communications Engineering

Ppeak signal

Prof. Okey Ugweje

2
q V pp

2 2L

FH S IK
N

gain, each additional bit (doubling L) increases SNR


by 6 dB

e NS j a6n f dB RST04,.77,

Federal University of Technology, Minna

c h

10 log10 2 2 n 6n dB
dB

dB

average SNR
peak SNR

Same technique is used to compute the SNR of a NQ


119

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

120

Non-uniform Quantization - 1

Non-uniform Quantization - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

For many classes of signals, UQ is not efficient


E.g., in speech signal smaller amplitudes predominate
and larger amplitudes are relatively rare
UQ will be wasteful for speech signals since many of
the quantizing levels are rarely used

An efficient scheme is to employ a non-uniform


quantizing method
Variable step sizes
smaller steps for small amplitudes
Let x = input
q(x) = quantized version
e(x) = x - q(x) = error
p(x) = pdf of x

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

121

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Non-uniform Quantization - 3

Federal University of Technology, Minna

122

Non-uniform Quantization - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

NQ operates in 2 regions (linear and saturation)

For NQ, error is amplitude dependent


2
Lin can be formulated into discrete outputs as in UQ

Let Emax = saturation amplitude of the quantizer

The noise variance is given by

q2 E x q ( x) 2

2 0 e 2 ( x) p ( x)dx

2 0 max e 2 ( x) p ( x)dx 2 Emax e 2 ( x) p ( x)dx

2 x n1 e 2 ( x) p ( x)dx
x

n 0

If we consider a quantile interval qn = (xn+1 xn) and


assume e(x) x

see eqn. 13.14

2
2
Lin
sat

Prof. Okey Ugweje

L
1
2

where xn is a quantizer level


Note: In Chapter 13, your textbook uses N instead of L

e 2 ( x) p ( x)dx
E

2
Lin

Federal University of Technology, Minna

123

2
Lin

Prof. Okey Ugweje

L
1
2

3
2 x
n 0 3

qn
2

qn
2

1 2
2
qn3
q
p ( xn ) 2 n p ( xn )qn
n 0 12
n 0 12
L
1
2

p ( xn ) 2

Federal University of Technology, Minna

124

Non-uniform Quantization - 5

##Uniform vs. Nonuniform Quantization

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Error is the weighted sum of error powers in each


quantile

Let

If the quantizer has uniform quantiles (i.e., UQ), then

Numerical integration will indicate that

L 1

2
2 qn2 p ( xn )qn
12 n0
L 1
2
1

2
2

q
q
12 n0 n qn L 2 n

D 0.1188, E[ x 2 ] 1

F SI
H NK

10 log10
avg

F 1 I 9.25dB
H 01188
K
.

However, NQ will yield a better result

1
q

L
2 1 q 2
q
12 2 q L 2
12
2

The best possible quantizer has

If the Q does not operate in the saturation region, then


2
q2 Lin
Prof. Okey Ugweje

1 x2
e
2

. , x2 0.498, x3 0.498, x4 1494


. q
lx11494

weighted by p(xn)qn
2
Lin

f X ( x)

FH S IK 12.0 dB
N avg
NQ can give better performance for most signals than UQ

Federal University of Technology, Minna

125

Types of Noise in Quantizer

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Important/Practical Systems Using Quantization - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Overload Noise (Saturation Noise)

Reading Assignment:
Differential Quantization

when input signal > Lmax resulting in clipping of signal

Granularity Noise (Quantization Noise)


when L are not finely spaced apart enough to accurately
approximate input signal

predited (linear interpolation)

Differeence
Value

Actual data
(k+3)T

Truncation or Rounding error

kT

This type of noise is signal dependent

(k+2)T

Is used to reduce the dynamic range


Interpolation from previous value if samples are
correlated
Correlation can be increased by oversampling

Timing Jitter
Error caused by a shift in the sampler position
Easily isolated with stable clock reference and power
supply isolation

Oversampling

Predictor

more samples/sec
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

126

127

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Differential
fewer samples/sec

Federal University of Technology, Minna

128

Important/Practical Systems Using Quantization - 2


Department of Communications Engineering

Example 22: (uniform quantization)


Department of Communications Engineering

Differential PCM (DPCM)


Delta Modulation
Linear Predictive Coding
Adaptive Predictive Coding

x (t )

Sampler

fs 2 B

Quantizer x( n )

x ( n)
xk

n = # of binary bits used to


represent each sample
fs = sampling frequency or
sampling rate
xk x[n] xq [n] = quantized
value of x(t)

20.Example 20
Quantization

2q

3q

Prof. Okey Ugweje

xk

7
2

5
2

3
2

1
2

011
010
001
000

21.Example 21
Uniform Qantrizer

x k

L 2n

111
110
101

100

2q

12 q

3q

xk

32 q
52 q
72 q

Uniform Quantizer

Federal University of Technology, Minna

129

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

130

Digital Communication System

Example - Quantization
Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Let the quantization level be {1,3,5,7}. Assume that


the input signal to a quantizer have the pdf shown
f ( x)
1
4

f ( x)
8

x (t )

RS ,
T 0,
x
32

0 x8
else

a) Compute the signal mean power


b) Compute the mean square error at the quantizer
output
c) Compute the output SNR
d) How would you change the distribution of the
quantization level in order to decrease the
distortion?
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Companding

131

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

132

Companding - 1

Companding - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Quantization along with sampling is used to generate


a Pulse Code Modulated (PCM) signal.
Using quantization, the instantaneous voltage value of
an analog signal is quantized into 28 (256) discrete
signal levels
With each sample, the signal is instantaneously
measured and adjusted to match one of the 256
discrete voltage levels
The adjustments of the voltage levels (256 discrete
levels), introduces some signal distortion

This distortion (quantizing noise) is greater for lowamplitude signals than for high-amplitude signals.
A technique called companding is used to correct this
problem
a method that compresses and divides the loweramplitude signals into more voltage levels and
provides more signal detail at the lower-voltage
amplitudes

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

133

Federal University of Technology, Minna

134

Companding - 4

Companding - 3
Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Definition: Companding is a process of COMpressing the


signal at the Tx and exPANDING the signal at the Rx

Why Compand?
improve resolution (enhance SQNR) of weak
signals by
enlarging the signal, or
decreasing quantization step size
improves resolution of strong signals by
reducing the signal or
increasing the required quantization step size
reducing the # of bits required in the ADC & DAC
while reducing the dynamic range or improving the
SQNR

Transmitter Side
Signal
Input

Compressor
LPF

law

S/H +
ADC

Transmitter

ADC

Regenerative
Repeater

Receiver Side
Signal
Output

Expander
LPF

law

Signal
Out

DAC

Receiver

Signal
In

DAC

amplitude of one of the


signals is compressed

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

135

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

136

Companding - 5

Companding - 6

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Since NQ are expensive and difficult to make, we


compand the signal and then use UQ
after compression, input of quantizer will have ly
uniform pdf

Companding is important for speech signals and has


been standardized for telephone interconnect around
the world
Two standards of companding techniques
US standard called -law algorithm

Companding introduces nonlinearity into the signal


maps nonuniform pdf into something resembling
uniform pdf

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

European standard called A-law algorithm


conversion is required when calls are made between
countries using different algorithms.

137

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Input/Output Relationship

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Types of Companding - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

1.0

1.0

y(t )
ymax

-Law Companding (North & South America,


Japan)

y(t )
ymax

x(t )
xmax

y( x) ymax

R|
L
O
F
I
x
log 1 x
MN H K PQ sgn(x) |Sy
log a1 f
||
|Ty
e

max

1.0

x(t )
xmax

FH IK
FH x x IK 1
log LF x x I O
NM H K PQ , FH x x IK 1
log

xx
max
,
max
loge

max

-1.0

138

max

max

max

where
x and y represent the input and output voltages
is a constant number determined by
experiment

Y = log X is the most commonly used compander


Taking the log of Y = log X reduces the dynamic range since

log e 1 x x if x 0
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

139

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

140

Types of Companding - 2

Types of Companding - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

In U.S., telephone lines uses = 255


Samples 4 kHz speech waveform at 8,000
sample/sec
Encodes each sample with 8 bits, L = 256 quantizer
levels
Hence data rate R = 64 kbit/sec
= 0 corresponds to uniform quantization

A-Law Companding (Europe, China, Russia, Asia,


Africa)

R| A x x
|y 1 A sgn(x),
S| L1 log F A x I O
H x K PQ sgn(x),
||y MN 1 log
A
T
max

y( x )

max

max

max

x
1
xmax A

See eqn. 2.23

1
1
A xmax
x

where
x and y represent the input and output voltages
A is a constant number determined by experiment, A = 87.6

You can find the companding gain by differentiating


the output
d
G

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

141

Prof. Okey Ugweje

dx

y( x )

x0

Federal University of Technology, Minna

142

Encoding - 1

Digital Communication System


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

A/D Converter

xa(t)
Analog
signal

Sampler

x[n]

Quantizer

Discrete-Time
signal

xq[n]

Line
Coder

an

Quantized
signal

Quantizer output is one of L possible signal levels

Encoding

For binary transmission, each quantized sample is


mapped into an n-bit binary word

Encoding is the process of representing each of


the L outputs of the quantizer by an n-bit code
word
one-to-one mapping - no distortion introduced
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

143

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

144

Encoding - 2

Pulse Modulation Techniques - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) is commonly used

Recall that analog signals can be represented by a


sequence of discrete samples (output of sampler)
APM results when some characteristic of the pulse
(amplitude, width or position) is varied in
correspondence with the data signal
Can be obtained either by Natural or Flat top Sampling

PCM refers to a digital baseband signal that is


generated directly from the quantizer output
Sometimes PCM is used interchangeably with
quantization

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

145

Pulse Modulation Techniques - 2

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

146

Pulse Modulation Techniques - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Two Types:
Pulse Amplitude Modulation (PAM)
The amplitude of the periodic pulse train is varied in
proportion to the sample values of the analog signal
Pulse Time Modulation
Encodes the sample values into the time axis of the digital
signal
Pulse Width Modulation (PWM)
Constant amplitude, width varied in proportion to the
signal
Pulse Duration Modulation (PDM)
sample values of the analog waveform are used in
determining the width of the pulse signal
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

147

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

148

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) - 1

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Analog

PCM
Sample

Quantize

Assign Code #

Convert to Binary #s

See Figure 2.16

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

149

Federal University of Technology, Minna

150

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) - 2

Quantization and encoding of a sampled signal


Department of Communications Engineering

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Department of Communications Engineering

Federal University of Technology, Minna

151

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

152

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) - 3

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Department of Communications Engineering

Federal University of Technology, Minna

153

Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) - 5

Federal University of Technology, Minna

154

Implementation of A/D Converters

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Advantages of PCM
Relatively inexpensive
Easily multiplexed
PCM waveforms from different sources can be
transmitted over a common digital channel (TDM)
Easily regenerated:
useful for long-distance communication e.g., telephone
Better noise performance than analog system
Modem is all digital, thus affording reliability, stability and is
readily adaptable to integrated circuits
Signals may be stored and time-scaled efficiently (e.g.,
satellite communication)
Efficient codes are readily available
Disadvantage
Requires wider bandwidth than analog signals
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

155

A/D Converter

xa(t)

Analog signal

x[n]
Sampler

Quantizer

Discrete-Time signal

xq[n]

Coder

Quantized signal

Digital signal

Quantizer

ADC

x f ( x )

SIO

n b its

Serial Input Output (SIO) circuit converts quantization


level to a sequence of bits n = log2 L

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

156

Digital Communication System

Comparison of Practical ADCs

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Counting or Ramp ADC


Test value is incremented in equal steps until
it is equal to input sample
Serial or Successive Approximation ADC
Uses binary search to narrow range of input
sample until desired accuracy is reached
Parallel or Flash ADC
Input samples compared with all possible
quantization levels at once

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Speech Coding

157

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Speech Coding - 1

Federal University of Technology, Minna

158

Speech Coding - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Introduction To Speech Coding


To date, most source encoding techniques is based on
the -law or the A-law companding of A/D and D/A
converters
They are often referred to as CODECS
A CODEC is a device designed to convert analog
signals, such as voice, into PCM-compressed samples
to be sent into digital carries
The process is reversed at the receiver
The term CODEC is an acronym for CODer/DECoder
signifying the pulse coding/decoding function of the
device

Originally, CODEC functions were managed by


separate devices, each performing the function
necessary for PCM communication such as, sampling,
quantization, A/D, D/A, filtering, companding, etc.
Presently, these function are integrated into a single
chip e.g. Intels 2913
CODECS form the digital interface for most telephone
lines all over the world
At the exchange each analog signal from the local
telco is converted using an 8-bit -law or A-law codec,
with a standardized sampling rate of 8000 times per/s

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

159

For max voice frequency 3400 Hz, Nyquist criterion is


satisfied
Federal University of Technology, Minna

160

Speech Coding - 3

Characteristics of Speech Signal - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

This results in a data rate of 64 kbps for each voice link


At the exchange, a number of these 8-bit data words from
different phone sources are multiplexed into a frame (32 for Etype and 24 for A-type systems)
They are then sent using either baseband or bandpass
signaling methods over the national and international exchange

Speech waveform have a number of useful properties


that can be exploited when designing efficient coders

They are then sent using


either baseband or
bandpass signaling
methods
In order to keep pace with
the codec sampling rate, a
new frame must be
constructed and sent
every 1/8000 sec (see fig.)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

1. Nonuniform probability
2.
3.
4.
5.

See Digital Communications by Andy


Bateman

Federal University of Technology, Minna

161

6.

distribution of speech amplitude


Nonzero autocorrelation between
successive speech samples
Non-flat nature of the speech
spectra
Existence of voiced and unvoiced
segments in speech
Quasi-periodicity of voice speech
signals
Speech signals are essentially
bandlimited

Prof. Okey Ugweje

(also see Fig. 13.18,


page 836)

Federal University of Technology, Minna

162

Hierarchy of Speech Coders

Characteristics of Speech Signal - 2


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

The most basic property of speech waveform that is


exploited in speech encoders is that they are
essentially bandlimited
A finite bandwidth means that it can be sampled at a
finite rate and reconstructed completely provided that
fs 2fmax (Nyquist criteria)

Speech Coders
Waveform Coders

163

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Vocoders

Frequency
Domain

Time
Domain

PCM

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Source Coders

Linear Predictive Coders

Nondifferential

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Power spectrum

Differential

Delta

ADPCM

CVSDM

APC

Subband Coding

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Adaptive Transform Coding

164

Coding Techniques for Speech - 1

Coding Techniques for Speech - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

The goal of all speech coding systems is to


transmit speech with the highest possible quality
using the least possible channel capacity
Speech coders differ widely in their approach to
achieve this objective
They all employ quantization & exploits different
properties of speech signal

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

In DPCM, the difference between successive samples are


encoded rather than the samples themselves
Since difference b/w samples are expected to be smaller than the
samples themselves, fewer bits are required to represent the
difference
because most signals sampled at Nyquist rate or faster exhibit
significant correlation between successive samples
165

Coding Techniques for Speech - 3

Federal University of Technology, Minna

166

Department of Communications Engineering

i.e., average change in successive samples is relatively


small
Speech signals fall into this group because samples of
speech signals is very strongly correlated from one sample
instant to the next
Antialiasing
Filter

Sampler

Prediction
Filter

Quantizer

DPCM
Signal

Digital Communication Channel


Regeneration
Circuit

DAC

Analog
Input
Signal

Prediction
Filter

DPCM Block Diagram


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Coding Techniques for Speech - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Analog
Input
Signal

Waveform Coding
A) Time Domain
Designed to represent the time domain characteristics of
speech signal
For high bit rates (16 - 64 kbps) it is sufficient to just sample
and quantize the time domain voice waveform, e.g., Differential
Pulse Code Modulation (DPCM)
Differential Pulse Code Modulation (DPCM)

Federal University of Technology, Minna

167

Hence exploiting this redundancy will result in better


performance
This is the concept behind DPCM
A refinement to this general approach is to predict
the current samples based on the previous sample
DPCM quantizes the difference of one sample and
the predicted value of the next sample (this is
usually much less than the absolute value of the
samples)
In practice, DPCM is implemented using a
prediction scheme that exploits the correlation
between successive samples
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

168

Coding Techniques for Speech - 5

Coding Techniques for Speech - 6

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Instead of quantizing & coding sample values, as in


PCM, an estimate is made (with linear prediction
filter) for the next sample value based on previous
sample
In DPCM, the error at the output of a prediction filter is
quantized, rather than the voice signal itself
It is assumed that the error of the prediction filter is much
smaller than the actual signal itself

DPCM Issues
Linear prediction filter is usually just a feed forward finiteduration impulse response (FIR) filter
The filter coefficients must be periodically transmitted
While DPCM works well on speech, it does not work well
for modem signals
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

169

Coding Techniques for Speech - 7

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

170

Coding Techniques for Speech - 8

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Unlike PCM, APCM and ADPCM however exploit


the redundancies present in the speech signal
because adaptive quantizers vary the step size between
quantization levels depending on whether speech is
loud or soft

Since the speech samples are highly correlated, it


means that the variance of the difference between
adjacent speech amplitude is smaller than the
variance of the signal itself
In ADPCM, the quantization resolution can be
changed on the fly
ADPCM allows speech to be encoded at 32 kb/s
This is used in the DECT
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Adaptive PCM (APCM) and Adaptive DPCM


(ADPCM):
Many sources are quasi-stationary in nature such
that the variance and the ACF of the source vary
slowly with time
The efficiency and performance of PCM can be
improved by exploiting the slowly time-varying
statistics of the source
A simple implementation is to use a uniform
quantizer that varies its step size according to the
past signal samples
Such techniques are known as APCM and ADPCM

Federal University of Technology, Minna

171

Delta Modulation (-mod):


In communication systems application, bandwidth is limited
A given transmission channel (wires-pairs, coaxial cables,
optical fibers, microwave links, and others) represents a
finite spectral resource
Hence, developing spectrally efficient (reduced bandwidth)
signaling technique is important
This is the motivation for Delta Modulation (DM)
If a quantizer of a DPCM is restricted to 1 bit (i.e. 2 levels
only q), then the resulting scheme is called DM
In other words, DM is a special case of DPCM where
there are only two quantization levels
Delta modulation can be implemented with an extremely
simple 1 bit quantizer
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

172

Coding Techniques for Speech - 9

Coding Techniques for Speech - 10

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Adaptive Delta Modulation


In conventional DM, both quantization and slope
overload noise is a problem
The exploitation of signal correlation in DPCM suggest
that oversampling a signal will increase the correlation
between samples
This can be overcome by oversampling (i.e., keeping
the DM size small and sampling at many times the
Nyquist rate)
It is an extreme case of DPCM in which signal is
oversampled and R = 1 bit/sample
Adaptive Delta Modulation at 16 kbits/sec can produce
reasonable quality speech
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

173

Coding Techniques for Speech - 11


Department of Communications Engineering

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

174

Coding Techniques for Speech - 12


Department of Communications Engineering

Subband Coding
Human ear cannot detect quantization distortion at
all frequency equally well
Human perceptions of speech quality depend on
the frequency band
Subband coders filter the speech signal into
multiple bands using Quadrature Mirror Filters
(QMF) or Discrete Fourier Transform (DFT)
That is, the speech is divided into many smaller
bands and then encode each subband separately
according to some perception criteria
Prof. Okey Ugweje

B) Frequency Domain
Spectral Waveform Coders manipulates the spectral
characteristics of speech waveform
Frequency domain samples are represented
according to their perceptual criteria
Subband Coding (SBC) is an example of spectral
waveform coding

Federal University of Technology, Minna

175

Band splitting is used to exploit the fact that individual


bands do not all contain signals with the same energy
This permits the accuracy of quantizer to be reduced in
bands with very low energy and very high energy
Higher MSE may be tolerated at very low and very high
frequencies

Band splitting can be done in many ways (equally or


unequally) using a bank of filters
Each subband is sampled at a bandpass Nyquist rate
(lower than the sampling rate) and then encoded with
different accuracy based on perception criteria
Filtered signals are quantized using standard PCM
(different R for each signal)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

176

Coding Techniques for Speech - 13

Coding Techniques for Speech - 14

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Adaptive Transform Coding


Signal samples are grouped into frames and
encoded into number of bits proportional to its
perception significance
Correlated time samples are transformed into
(hopefully) uncorrelated frequency domain samples
using FFT or Discrete Cosine Transform
This is a more complex technique which involves
block transformations of input segment of the
speech signal

Source Coding (Model-Based Encoding)


For low bit rate voice encoding it is necessary to
mathematically model the voice and transmit the
parameters associated with the model
This type of coding attempts to replicate a model of
the process by which speech was constructed

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

177

Coding Techniques for Speech - 15

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Coding Techniques for Speech - 16

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

A) Linear Predictive Coding (LPC)


Linear Predictive Coding (LPC) uses a prediction
algorithm for synthesis of the desired signal
Human speech is modeled as noise (air from lungs)
exciting a linear filter (throat, vocal cords, and mouth)
The excitation sequence and filter coefficients are
quantized by a linear prediction speech encoder

Vector quantization is frequently used in this technique


In LPC, speech is divided into frames of approximately 20 ms
Linear predictive coding is similar to DPCM with the following
exceptions:
prediction filter is more complex

Excitted
Sequence

Prediction Filter

Filter Coefficients

Filter Gain

Federal University of Technology, Minna

more taps in the FIR filter

filter coefficients are transmitted more frequently


once every 20 milliseconds

The error signal is not transmitted directly


The error signal can be considered as a type of noise
Instead the statistics of the noise are transmitted

Output Speech

Power level
Whether voiced (vowels) or unvoiced (consonants)

LPC quantizes excitation sequence, filter coefficients


and filter gain and transmits them to receiver
Prof. Okey Ugweje

178

This is where big savings (in terms of bit rate) comes from
179

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

180

Coding Techniques for Speech - 17


Department of Communications Engineering

B) Vocoder (voice coders)


Vocoders are coding devices that extract significant
components of a speech waveform, exploiting speech
redundancies, to achieve low bit rate transmission
Most vocoding techniques are based on linear
predictive coding
Vector Sum Excited Linear Prediction (VSELP)
Employed in U.S. Digital Cellular (IS-136) standard
Uses 20 ms frames
Each frame is represented with 159 bits (Total data
rate is 8 kbps)
A two stage vector quantizer is used to quantize the
excitation sequence
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

181

Comparison of Speech Coding Standards


Department of Communications Engineering

Type
PCM
ADPCM
Subband
VSELP
Theory

Some bits (like filter gain) are much more important for
perpetual quality than others. These are protected by
error correction coding
RPE-LTP
Regular Pulse Excited Long Term Prediction
Used in GSM (European Digital Cellular) 13 kbps
QCELP
Qualcomm Code Excited Linear Predictive Coder
Used in IS-95. (US Spread Spectrum Cellular)
Variable bit rate (full, half, quarter, eighth)
Original full rate was 9.6 kbps
Revised standard (QCELP-13) uses 14.4 kbps
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

182

Tradeoff: Voice Quality vs. Bit Rate


Department of Communications Engineering

Rate Complexity
(kb/s)
(MIPS)
64
32
16
8
~1

0.01
0.1
1
~100
?

Delay
(ms)
0
0
25
35
?

Quality

Perceived
Speech
Quality

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Excellent (5)

Toll quality

Good (4)

High
High
High
Fair
High

Fair (3)

Communications
quality

Poor (2)
Vocoders

Unsatisfactory (1)
1.2

References for Speech Coding Techniques:


N. S. Jayant, Coding Speech at Low Bit Rates, IEEE
Spectrum, August 1986.
N. S. Jayant, et. al., Coding of Speech and Wideband
Audio, AT&T Technical Journal, October 1990.
this article is more technical than the first, but still very
readable
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Coding Techniques for Speech - 18


Department of Communications Engineering

2.4

Waveform coders

4.8
9.6
16
Bit Rate (kbps)

24

32

64

The bit rate produced by the voice coder can be


reduced at a price
Increased hardware complexity
Reduced perceived speech quality
183

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

184

Image and Video Coding

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

1000x1000 pixel image with 8 bits for each of 3 colors


requires 24 Mbits to encode
Video requires ~ 20 frames/second
Compression standards vital for any hope of digital
video
JPEG: Image compression of 20:1 or more
MPEG: Video compression of 100:1 or more

Digital-To-Digital Conversion
(Line Coding)

Reference:
P. H. Ang, et. al., Video Compression Makes Big
Gains, IEEE Spectrum, October 1990
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

185

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Digital-To-Digital Conversion

Federal University of Technology, Minna

186

Line Coding - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

In this section, we see how we can represent digital


data by using digital signals.
The conversion involves three techniques: line coding,
block coding, and scrambling.
Line coding is always needed; block coding and
scrambling may or may not be needed.

Line coding is the process of converting digital data


to digital signals. We assume that data, in the form of
text, numbers, graphical images, audio, or video, are
stored in computer memory as sequences of bits.

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

187

Line coding and decoding

Federal University of Technology, Minna

188

Line Coding - 2

Line Coding - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Signal Element Vs Data Element

Let r be the number of data elements carried by each


signal element. Figure below shows several situations
with different values of r.

In data communications, our goal is to send data


elements.
A data element is the smallest entity that can represent
a piece of information: this is the bit.
In digital data communications, a signal element carries
data elements.
A signal element is the shortest unit (timewise) of a
digital signal. In other words, data elements are what
we need to send; signal elements are what we can
send. Data elements are being carried; signal elements
are the carriers.
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

189

Signal element versus data element

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Line Coding - 4

Federal University of Technology, Minna

190

Example

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Data Rate Vs Signal Rate


Data rate defines the number of data elements (bits) sent in
1s. The unit is bits per second (bps).
Signal rate is the number of signal elements sent in 1s. The
unit is the baud.
The data rate is sometimes called the bit rate; the signal rate
is sometimes called the pulse rate, the modulation rate, or
the baud rate.
Relationship of data rate & signal rate (bit rate & baud rate).

A signal is carrying data in which one data element is encoded


as one signal element ( r = 1). If the bit rate is 100 kbps, what is
the average value of the baud rate if c is between 0 and 1?
Solution
We assume that the average value of c is 1/2 . The baud rate is
then

This relationship, of course, depends on the value of r. It also


depends on the data pattern C. If we have a data pattern of all 1s
or all 0s, the signal rate may be different from a data pattern of
alternating 0s and 1s.

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

191

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

192

Line Coding - 5

Example

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Although the actual bandwidth of a digital signal is


infinite, the effective bandwidth is finite.
we can say that the bandwidth (range of frequencies)
is proportional to the signal rate (baud rate). The
minimum bandwidth can be given as

The maximum data rate of a channel (see Chapter 3) is


Nmax = 2 B log2 L (defined by the Nyquist formula).
Does this agree with the previous formula for Nmax?
Solution
A signal with L levels actually can carry log2L bits per level. If each
level corresponds to one signal element and we assume the average
case (c = 1/2), then we have

We can solve for the maximum data rate if the bandwidth of the
channel is given.

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

193

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Transmitter - 1

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Transmitter - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Output of the A/D converter is a set of binary bits

A line coder or baseband binary transmitter


transforms a stream of bits into a physical waveform
suitable for transmission over a channel
There are many types of waveforms. Why?
performance criteria!
Each line code type have merits and demerits
The choice of waveform depends on operating
characteristics of a system such as

which are abstract entities that have no physical definition

We use pulses to convey a bit of information, e.g.,


f(t)

f(t)

-1

1
T

To transmit over a physical channel, bits must be


transformed into a physical waveform
Baseband systems transmit data using many kinds of
pulses
Before signals are applied to the modulator, it may be
put into several different waveforms
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

194

195

Modulation-demodulation requirements
Bandwidth requirement
Synchronization requirement
Receiver complexity, etc.,
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

196

Goals of Line Coding (qualities to look for) - 1

Goals of Line Coding (qualities to look for) - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Baseline Wandering
In decoding a digital signal, the receiver calculates a running
average of the received signal power. This average is called
the baseline.
The incoming signal power is evaluated against this baseline
to determine the value of the data element.
A long string of 0s or 1s can cause a drift in the baseline
(baseline wandering) and make it difficult for the receiver to
decode correctly.
A good line coding scheme needs to prevent baseline
wandering.

DC Components
When the voltage level in a digital signal is constant for a
while, the spectrum creates very low frequencies.
These frequencies around zero, called DC (direct-current)
components, present problems for a system that cannot
pass low frequencies or a system that uses electrical
coupling (via a transformer).
For example, a telephone line cannot pass frequencies
below 200 Hz. Also a long-distance link may use one or
more transformers to isolate different parts of the line
electrically.
For these systems, we need a scheme with no DC
component.

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

197

Goals of Line Coding (qualities to look for) - 3

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Goals of Line Coding (qualities to look for) - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Self-synchronization

Low probability of bit error

To correctly interpret the signals received from the


sender, the receiver's bit intervals must correspond
exactly to the sender's bit intervals. If the receiver clock
is faster or slower, the bit intervals are not matched and
the receiver might misinterpret the signals.
The ability to recover timing from the signal itself
i.e., self-clocking (self-synchronization)
- ease of clock lock or signal recovery for symbol synch.

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Receiver needs to be able to distinguish the waveform


associated with a mark (or 1) from a space (or 0)
BER performance
relative immunity to noise

Error detection capability


enhances low probability of error

Transparency

Long series of ones and zeros could cause a problem

Prof. Okey Ugweje

198

property that any arbitrary symbol or bit pattern can be


transmitted and received, i.e., all possible data
sequence should be faithfully reproducible
199

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

200

Goals of Line Coding (qualities to look for) - 5

Summary of Major Line Codes - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Spectrum suitable for the channel

Categories of Line Codes


1. Polar - send pulse or negative of pulse
2. Unipolar - send pulse or a 0
3. Bipolar (a.k.a. Alternate Mark Inversion (AMI), pseudoternary)

Spectrum matching of the channel


e.g. presence or absence of DC level

In some cases DC components should be avoided


The transmission bandwidth should be minimized

Represent 1 by alternating signed pulses

Power Spectral Density (PSD)

Generalized Pulse Shapes


1. NRZ - pulse lasts entire bit period
2. RZ - pulse lasts just half of bit period
3. Manchester Line Code

Particularly its value at zero


PSD of code should be negligible at the frequency near zero

Transmission bandwidth
Should be as small as possible

Send a 2- pulse for either 1 (highlow) or 0 (lowhigh)

4. HS ( Half Sine)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

201

Summary of Major Line Codes - 2

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

202

Summary of Major Line Codes - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Combined category and generalized pulse shapes

Bipolar RZ
Alternate between positive and negative pulses to send a 1
This alternation eliminates the DC component

Polar NRZ
Wireless, radio, satellite applications (bandwidth efficient)
Unipolar NRZ
Turn the pulse ON for a 1, leave the pulse OFF for a 0 in
entire bit period
For noncoherent communication where receiver cant decide
the sign of a pulse
fiber optic communication often use this signaling format
Unipolar RZ
RZ signaling has both a rising and falling edge of the pulse
This can be useful for timing and synchronization purposes

There are many other variations of line codes (see Fig. 2.22,
page 87 for more)

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

203

desirable for many channels that cannot transmit DC components

Generalized Grouping
Non-Return-to-Zero:
Return-to-Zero:
Phase-Coded:
Multilevel Binary:

NRZ-L, NRZ-M NRZ-S


Unipolar, Bipolar, AMI
bi--L, bi--M, bi--S, Miller, Delay Mod.
dicode, doubinary

Federal University of Technology, Minna

204

Summary of Major Line Codes - 4

Line Coder

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Line Coder

Xn

s( t )

Input Xn is the output of the A/D converter


or a sequence of values that is a function of the data bit

Output is given by

where

These values are determined by the type of line code


that is being used

Federal University of Technology, Minna

205

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Department of Communications Engineering

1. Unipolar NRZ
Unipolar NRZ is defined by unipolar mapping

Unipolar NRZ

RS A,
T 0,

FG t IJ ,
HT K

Compared with its polar counterpart, this scheme is


very costly
The normalized power (power needed to send 1 bit
per unit line resistance) is double that for polar NRZ
For this reason, this scheme is normally not used in
data communications today

NRZ Pulse Shape

where Tb is the bit period


A

Prof. Okey Ugweje

206

when X n 1
when X n 0

The pulse shape for unipolar NRZ is:


f (t )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Commonly Used Line Codes - 2

Commonly Used Line Codes - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

an

an = symbol mapping function


f(t) = pulse shape function
Tb = bit period (Tb=Ts/n for n bit quantizer)

NRZ = Non-Return-to-Zero
RZ = Return-to-Zero
AMI = Alternate Mark Inversion
Prof. Okey Ugweje

s(t ) an f (t nTb )

Tb

2Tb

3Tb

4Tb

5Tb

Federal University of Technology, Minna

207

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

208

Commonly Used Line Codes - 3

Commonly Used Line Codes - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

2. Polar Line Codes


A Polar line code uses the antipodal mapping

Polar NRZ-L and NRZ-I

an

RS A,
T A,

when Xn 1
when Xn 0

where Xn is the nth data bit

Polar NRZ uses NRZ pulse shape


Polar RZ uses RZ pulse shape
1

Tb
0

1
nonreturn to zero- level; nonreturn to zero- invert

4Tb

2Tb

3Tb

2Tb

3Tb

5Tb

Polar NRZ

In NRZ-L the level of the voltage determines the value of the bit.
In NRZ-I the inversion or the lack of inversion determines the value of the bit.

-A
A

4Tb

Tb
0

-A
Prof. Okey Ugweje

5Tb

Polar RZ

Federal University of Technology, Minna

NRZ-L and NRZ-I both have an average signal rate of N/2 Bd.
NRZ-L and NRZ-I both have a DC component problem.
209

Commonly Used Line Codes - 5

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

210

Commonly Used Line Codes - 6

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Polar NRZ-L and NRZ-I

3. Bipolar Line Codes


A space is mapped to '0' & a mark is alternately
mapped to -A and +A
A, when Xn 1 and last mark -A
an A, when Xn 1 and last mark +A
0, when Xn 0

Baseline Wandering is a problem for both variations, it is


twice as severe in NRZ-L. If there is a long sequence of 0s
or ls in NRZ-L, the average signal power becomes skewed.
The receiver might have difficulty discerning the bit value. In
NRZ-I this problem occurs only for a long sequence of 0s. If
somehow we can eliminate the long sequence of 0s, we can
avoid baseline wandering. We will see shortly how this can
be done.
The synchronization problem (sender and receiver clocks
are not synchronized) also exists in both schemes. Again,
this problem is more serious in NRZ-L than in NRZ-I. While a
long sequence of 0s can cause a problem in both schemes,
a long sequence of ls affects only NRZ-L.

R|
S|
T

Also called pseudoternary or AMI


Either RZ or NRZ pulse shape can be used
A

2Tb
0

3Tb

Tb

5Tb
4Tb

Bipolar
RZ

-A
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

211

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

212

Commonly Used Line Codes - 8

Commonly Used Line Codes - 7


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Polar Biphase: Manchester Line Codes


Uses antipodal mapping and split-phase pulse shape

Ft T I Ft T I
f (t) G T 4 J G T 4 J
GH JK GH JK
b

21

-A

In Manchester and differential Manchester encoding, the transition at


the middle of the bit is used for synchronization.
The minimum bandwidth of Manchester and differential Manchester is
2 times that of NRZ.
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

213

Commonly Used Line Codes - 9

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

214

Commonly Used Line Codes - 10

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Bipolar schemes: AMI and pseudoternary


Bipolar encoding (a.k.a multilevel binary), three levels are used: positive,
zero, and negative.

The bipolar scheme was developed as an alternative to NRZ. It has the


same signal rate as NRZ, but there is no DC component.
The NRZ scheme has most of its energy concentrated near zero frequency,
which makes it unsuitable for transmission over channels with poor
performance around this frequency. The concentration of the energy in
bipolar encoding is around frequency N/2.
Prof. Okey Ugweje

The Manchester scheme overcomes several problems associated with NRZ-L, and
differential Manchester overcomes several problems associated with NRZ-I.
First, there is no baseline wandering. There is no DC component because each bit
has a positive and negative voltage contribution.
The only drawback is the signal rate. The signal rate for Manchester and differential
Manchester is double that for NRZ. The reason is that there is always one transition
at the middle of the bit and maybe one transition at the end of each bit.

Federal University of Technology, Minna

215

mBnL Multilevel Scheme:


In the schemes, a pattern of m data elements is encoded as
a pattern of n signal elements in which 2m Ln.
E.g., Multilevel: 2B1Q scheme (two binary, one
quaternary).
It uses data patterns of size 2 and encodes the 2-bit patterns
as one signal element belonging to a four-level signal. In this
type of encoding m = 2, n = 1, and L = 4 (quaternary).
The average signal rate of 2B1Q is S = N/4. This means that
using 2B1Q, we can send data 2 times faster than by using
NRZ-L. However, 2B 1Q uses four different signal levels,
which means the receiver has to discern four different
thresholds.

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

216

Commonly Used Line Codes - 11

Commonly Used Line Codes - 12

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Multilevel: 8B6T scheme eight binary, six ternary


The idea is to encode a pattern of 8 bits as a pattern of 6 signal
elements, where the signal has 3 levels (ternary).

The 3 possible signal levels are represented as -, 0, and +.


The first 8-bit pattern 00010001 is encoded as the signal pattern -00++ with weight 0; the second 8-bit pattern 01010011 is encoded as + - + + 0 with weight +1. The third bit pattern should be encoded as +
- - + 0 + with weight +1.
To create DC balance, the sender inverts the actual signal. The
receiver can easily recognize that this is an inverted pattern because
the weight is -1. The pattern is inverted before decoding.
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

217

Commonly Used Line Codes - 13

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

218

Commonly Used Line Codes - 14

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Multilevel: 8B6T scheme eight binary, six ternary


28

Multitransition: MLT-3 scheme


36

In this scheme, we can have = 256 different data patterns and =


478 different signal patterns. There are 478 - 256 = 222 redundant
signal elements that provide synchronization and error detection.
Part of the redundancy is also used to provide DC balance. Each
signal pattern has a weight of 0 or +1 DC values.
That is, there is no pattern with the weight -1.
To make the whole stream DC-balanced, the sender keeps track of
the weight. If two groups of weight 1 are encountered one after
another, the first one is sent as is, while the next one is totally
inverted to give a weight of -1.

1. If next bit is 0, there is no transition.


2. If next bit is 1 and the current level is not 0, the next level is 0.
3. If the next bit is 1 and the current level is 0, the next level is the
opposite of the last nonzero level.

The average signal rate of the scheme is theoretically


The minimum bandwidth is very close to 6N/8.
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

219

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

220

Commonly Used Line Codes - 15


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Multitransition: MLT-3 scheme


One scheme that maps one bit to one signal element.
The signal rate is the same as that for NRZ-I, but with greater
complexity (three levels and complex transition rules).
It turns out that the shape of the signal in this scheme helps to
reduce the required bandwidth.
Let us look at the worst-case scenario, a sequence of 1 s. In
this case, the signal element pattern +V0 -V0 is repeated every
4 bits.
A nonperiodic signal has changed to a periodic signal with the
period equal to 4 times the bit duration.
This worst-case situation can be simulated as an analog signal
with a frequency one-fourth of the bit rate. In other words, the
signal rate for MLT-3 is one-fourth the bit rate.
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

221

Summary of Line Codes


NRZ-M

+V

1
NRZ level (or change)
"1" represented by one level
"0" represented by other level

-V
+V

Bipolar
RZ
RZ-AMI
Bi-o-L

-V
+V

NRZ Space
"1" represented by no change in level
"0" represented by a change in level

-V
+V
0
+V

Bipolar RZ
"0's" & "1's" represented by opposite level polar
pulses that are half-bit wide

-V
+V
-V
+V

Bi-phase Level (Manchester II + 180)


"1" represented by a "10"
"0" represented by a "01"

+V

Bi-phase Space
A transition at beginning of every bit period
"1" represented by a no 2nd transition
"0" represented by a 2nd transition one-half bit period
later

-V

+V
Delay
Modulation -V
+V
Decode
NRZ
-V
Decode
RZ

Decode NRZ
A "1" to "0" or "0" to "1" transition produces a half
duration polarity change; otherwise a zero is sent.

-V

0
Prof. Okey Ugweje

2T

3T

4T

5T

6T

7T

8T

9T

10T

11T

Federal University of Technology, Minna

s(t )

an f t nTs

X(f )

R (k )e j 2 fkTs

Ts k

where R(k) is the Autocorrelation (AC) Function of the data


sequence at the encoder output
For Autocorrelation please see Section 1.4

Delay Modulation
A "1" to "0" or "0" to "1" changes polarity;
otherwise a zero is sent.

+V

s( t )

Gs ( f )

Bi-phase Mark (Manchester I)


A transition at beginning of every bit period
"1" represented by a 2nd transition 1/2 bit period later
"0" represented by no 2nd transition

+V

Line Coder

Average PSD of a line code is given by

RZ AMI
"0" represented by no signal; successive "1's"
represented by equal amplitude alternating pulses

-V
Bi-o-S

222

Ts = symbol duration (Ts= Tb for binary, Ts= kTb for M-ary)


f(t) = symbol pulse shape
an = a set of Random Variables representing data bits (voltage level of data)

Unipolar RZ
"1" represented by a 1/2-bit wide pulse
"0" represented by no pulse condition

-V
Bi-o-M

Xn

NRZ Mark
"1" represented by a change in level
"0" represented by no change in level

NRZ-S
Unipolar
RZ

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Department of Communications Engineering

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Power Spectral Density (PSD) of Line Codes - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

NRZ-L

Summary of line coding schemes

Decode RZ
A "1" represented by a transition at the midpoint of a
bit interval; a "0" is represented by no transition
unless it is followed by another zero; In this case, a
transition is placed at the end of the bit period.

Correlation is a matching process


AC is the matching of a signal with the delayed version of itself
223

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

224

Power Spectral Density (PSD) of Line Codes - 2

Power Spectral Density (PSD) of Line Codes - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

AC is denoted as RXX(t1,t2) or RXX(t, t+) or RXX()


AC of a random process X(t) is given by

Average PSD of a line code (contd)


R( k ) E an an k , k 0,1, 2,

RXX t1 , t2 E X t1 X * t2

x1 x2 f x1 , x2 ; t1 , t2 dx1dx2

It follows that

a f

an an* k i Pi
i 1

where

af af

RXX t1, t2 E X t2 X t1
*

Value of RX(t1, t2) when t1 = t2 = t is the average power


of X(t), i.e.,

Pi = probability of getting (anan+k)i


M = # of positive values of anan+k

a f

RXX t, t E X 2 t 0
Reading Assignment: Section 1.4
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

225

How to Compute PSD of Line Codes - 1

Federal University of Technology, Minna

226

How to Compute PSD of Line Codes - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Unipolar line codes

Brute-force Method
Model s(t) as a Wide Sense Stationary (WSS) random
process
Find Autocorrelation Function (ACF) of s(t)

Gs ( f )

Gs ( f )

Apply Wiener-Khintchine theorem to get PSD


PSD of a RP X(t), GX(f), is the Fourier transform of the ACF

Shortcut Method for Finding PSD of a Line Code

A2
2
X ( f ) sin 2 fTb
Tb

Unipolar Line Codes with NRZ Pulse Shapes


If the pulse shape is NRZ, then
n
X ( f ) 0for f when n 0
Tb
Thus
A2
2
Gs ( f )
X ( f ) 1 ( f )
4Tb

Assume equiprobable & independent data symbols


Polar line codes
2
A
2
X(f )
Tb
X(f) = Fourier Transform of the pulse shape
Gs ( f )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

A2
1
n
2
X ( f ) 1
f
4Tb
Tb
Tb n

Bipolar line codes

this step can be tricky & cumbersome!

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

227

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

228

Example 24

Example 24 Solution

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

For k 0:
4
R(k ) an ank i pi

Find the PSD of x(t) Unipolar NRZ


1

i 1

2Tb

Tb

3Tb

4Tb

an ank 1 p1 an an k 2 p2 an ank 3 p3 an ank 4 p4

5Tb

x1 (t ) A, 0 t Tb binary 1

0 0 14 0 A 14 A 0 14 A A 14

x0 (t ) 0, 0 t Tb binary 0

A2

Possible levels = A, 0
Assume that values are equally likely to occur with probability Pi = 0.5
For k=0:
k=0
k0

anan

anan+k

00

00

11

01

Hence,

A2
2 , k 0
R(k ) 2
A , k 0
4

R(0) an an i pi
i 1

an an 1 p1 an an 2 p2

10

0 0 12 A A 12

11
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

A2
2
229

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Example 24 Solution

Department of Communications Engineering

A2Tb sin fTb


Gs f

4 fTb

sin fTb
t

Tb

fTb
Tb

j 2 fkTb

sin fTb
j 2 fkTb
Tb
R (k )e
k
fTb
A Tb sin fTb

4 fTb

A2Tb sin fTb

4 fTb

Prof. Okey Ugweje

1
e j 2 fkTb
k

1
f Tkb Fourier Series
Tb k

we can write

Using the fact that

Applying the formula


2
1
Gs f
X f R (k )e j 2 fkTb
k
Tb

230

Example 24 Solution

Department of Communications Engineering

But

Federal University of Technology, Minna

A2
2

A42

Since

2 e j 2 fkTb
k ,k 0

f Tkb
1 T k
b

sin fTb
0 @ f Tkb , k 0
fTb

we have

A2Tb sin fTb


Gs f

4 fTb

2
e j 2 fkTb e j 2 fkTb
k

k 0

Federal University of Technology, Minna

A2Tb sin fTb


Gs f

4 fTb

231

Prof. Okey Ugweje

1 T f
b

Federal University of Technology, Minna

232

Example 25

Example 26

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Find the PSD of x(t) Unipolar RZ


A,
x2 (t ) 1
1
(
)
x
t

0
1
0

1
A
0,
0

Tb

2Tb

3Tb

0 t T2b
binary 1
Tb
2 t Tb

4Tb

Find the PSD of x(t) NRZ-L

x 3 (t )

A 1

x0 (t ) 0, 0 t Tb binary 0

-A

This is the same as Unipolar NRZ except for pulse duration


of Tb/2 instead of Tb
Hence
T sin f T2b
Xf b

2 f T2b

Gs f

A2Tb sin f T2b

16 f T2b

Prof. Okey Ugweje

(Left as an exercise. Please do)

1 1
f Tnb
Tb n

Federal University of Technology, Minna

233

Comparison of Line Codes - 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Comparison of Line Codes - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Self-synchronization (SS)

Power Spectral Density comparison:

SS codes are good for error detection and correction

Different pulse shapes are used

Manchester codes have built in timing info because they


always have a zero crossing in the center of the pulse
Polar RZ codes tend to be good because the signal level
always goes to zero for the 2nd half of the pulse
NRZ signals do not have good SS capabilities

Error probability
Polar codes perform better (more energy efficient) than
Unipolar or Bipolar codes
Requires PSD of the line codes to determine channel
matching characteristics
Federal University of Technology, Minna

to control the spectrum of the transmitted signal

(no DC value, bandwidth, etc.)

guarantee transitions every symbol interval to assist in


symbol timing recovery

After line coding, the pulses may be filtered or shaped


to further improve there properties such as
Spectral efficiency
Immunity to Inter-symbol Interference (ISI)

Distinction between Line Coding and Pulse Shaping is


not easy

Channel characteristics

Prof. Okey Ugweje

234

235

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

236

Comparison of Line Codes - 3

Comparison of Line Codes - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Department of Communications Engineering

Federal University of Technology, Minna

237

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Comparison of Line Codes - 5

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Comparison of Line Codes - 6

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

DC Components

Summary

Unipolar NRZ, polar NRZ, and unipolar RZ all have DC


components
Bipolar RZ and Manchester NRZ do not have DC
components

First Null Bandwidth


Unipolar NRZ, polar NRZ, and bipolar all have 1st null
bandwidths of Rb = 1/Tb
Unipolar RZ has 1st null BW of 2Rb
Manchester NRZ also has 1st null BW of 2Rb, although
the spectrum becomes very low at 1.6Rb

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

238

239

Timing

Error
Detection

Average
Power

Peak
Power

First Null
Bandwidth

AC
coupled

Transparent

Unipolar NRZ

Difficult

No

f0

No

No

Unipolar RZ

Simple

No

2f0

No

No

Polar NRZ

Difficult

No

f0

No

No

Polar RZ

Rectify

No

1/2

2f0

No

No

Bipolar NRZ

Difficult

No

2f0

Yes

No

Bipolar RZ

Simple

No

2f0

Yes

Yes

Dipolar NRZ

Rectify

Yes

f0

Yes

No

Dipolar RZ

Difficult

Yes

f0/2

Yes

No

HDB3

Rectify

Yes

f0

Yes

Yes

CMI

Simple

Yes

2f0

Yes

Yes

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

240

Generation of Line Codes

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Transmitter:
1

N
2N

ROM
0
1

3N

an

-1
+1

4N

binary
bits

Make
Impulse

5N

an [n]

impulse train which


represents the data

2N

3N

4N

5N

anp[n]

h[n] = p[n]

s[n]

Pulse Shaping
Inter-symbol Interference

pulse shape defined by impulse


response of FIR filter

The FIR filter realizes the different pulse shapes


Baseband modulation with arbitrary pulse shapes can be detected by
correlation detector
matched filter detector (this is the most common detector)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

241

Baseband Communication System

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Problems with Line Codes - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Baseband Communication System:

A) Line codes are not bandlimited

Input

A/D
Converter

an

Line
Coder

s(t )

Channel

Decoder

Transmiter

A/D
Converter

Output

We have been considering the transmitter side


Analog Input

an

Line
Coder

s(t )

Channel

absolute bandwidth, B, is infinite


power outside the 1st null bandwidth is not negligible
i.e., power in the sidelobes can be quite high
This can cause Adjacent Channel Interference (ACI)

Receiver

A/D
Converter

242

If transmission channel is bandlimited, then high freq


components will be cut off

To Receiver

High freq components correspond to sharp transition in


pulses
Hence, the pulse will spread out
If pulse spreads out into adjacent symbol period, then
inter-symbol interference (ISI) occurred

Transmiter

Transmitted signal is created by the line coder


according to

s(t ) an g (t nTb )
n

where an is the information sequence & g(t) is pulse shape


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

243

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

244

Problems with Line Codes - 3

Problems with Line Codes - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Illustration of ISI

B) Inter-symbol Interference (ISI)


ISI occurs when a pulse spreads out in such a way that
it interferes with adjacent pulses at the sample instant
Causes

Assume polar NRZ line code


data 1
data 0

1. Channel induced distortion which spreads or disperses


the pulses
2. Multipath effects (echo)

245

Problems with Line Codes - 4

Tb

Tb

Tb

output

Tb

2Tb

3Tb

4Tb

5Tb

Tb

2Tb

3Tb

4Tb

5Tb

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

246

Department of Communications Engineering

Nyquist in the 1940s, studied the problem of ISI


He suggested that by carefully manipulating the filtering
characteristics of the channel (Tx and/or Rx), ISI can be control
Recall filter Characteristics

Channel output is the sum of the contributions from


each bit
0

2Tb

Tb

4Tb

3Tb

5Tb

Tb

2Tb

3Tb

4Tb

5Tb

A filter is a freq selective device used to limit the spectrum of signal to


some band of interest
Filters take an input waveform and modify the freq spectrum to produce
an output waveform
Filters are energy storing elements used as frequency discriminator

Some Notes on ISI


ISI can occur whenever a non-bandlimited line code is
used over a bandlimited channel
ISI can occur only at the sampling instants
Overlapping pulses will not cause ISI if they have zero
amplitude at the time the signal is sampled
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Tb

Tb

Strategies for Eliminating ISI - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Tb

Input data stream and bit superposition

3. Due to improper filtering (@ Tx and/or Rx), the received


pulses overlap one another thus making detection
difficult
Federal University of Technology, Minna

Tb

input

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Tb

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Filter Classifications

Ideal Filter:
A

X(f)

-B

Has a constant passband


Perfect rejection
No transition region

Filter is not physically realizable, only used for problem solving


247

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

248

Strategies for Eliminating ISI - 2

Strategies for Eliminating ISI - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

H( f )

LPF
-f1

f1

Ideal Filters

Low-Pass Filter (LPF)


High-Pass Filter (HPF)
Band-Pass Filter (BPF)
Band-Stop Filter (BSF)

For the ideal low-pass filter transfer function with bandwidth Wf =


fu hertz can be written as:

H( f )

HPF
f1

-f1

H ( f ) H ( f ) e j ( f )

(1.58)

H( f )

Where

BPF
-f2

-f1

f1

f2

f2

1
H( f )
0

H( f )

BSF
-f2

-f1

f1

for | f | fu
for | f | f u
(1.59)

Filter functions are implied in their respective names,

j ( f )

j 2 ft0

e.g., a LPF passes all freqs in the neighborhood of zero


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

249

Strategies for Eliminating ISI - 4

Ideal low-pass filter


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Ideal Filters

The impulse response of the ideal low-pass filter:

For the ideal band-pass filter


transfer function

h ( t ) 1 { H ( f )}

250

Department of Communications Engineering

Ideal Filters

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Strategies for Eliminating ISI - 5

Department of Communications Engineering

(1.60)

For the ideal high-pass filter


transfer function

H ( f ) e j 2 ft df

fu

e j 2 ft0 e j 2 ft df

fu

fu

e j 2 f ( t t0 ) df

fu

2 fu

sin 2 f u ( t t 0 )
2 f u ( t t 0 )

Ideal band-pass filter

2 f u sin nc 2 f u ( t t 0 )
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

251

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Ideal high-pass filter

Federal University of Technology, Minna

252

Strategies for Eliminating ISI - 7

Strategies for Eliminating ISI - 6


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Frequency response of a typical filter is shown below:

Realizable Filters

H( f )

The simplest example of a realizable low-pass filter; an RC filter

H(f)

1 j 2 f

1 (2 f ) 2

H ( f ) max

j ( f )

0.707 H ( f ) max

Skirt of the filter

1/2-power
bandwidth, B
Stop Band

Transition
Band

f1

f2
Passband

f
Transition
Band

Stop Band

Such a filter is characterized by three regions:


1.Passband:
freqs in this band are transmitted with little or no attenuation

2.Stopband:
the freqs in this band are completely rejected

3.Transition band (roll off):


the gain of the freqs gradually falls off
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

253

Strategies for Eliminating ISI - 8

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Department of Communications Engineering

Realizable Filters

Realizable Filters

There are several useful approximations to the ideal low-pass filter


characteristic and one of these is the Butterworth filter

characteristic of RC filter

Hn ( f )

1 ( f / fu )2 n

Prof. Okey Ugweje

254

Strategies for Eliminating ISI - 9

Department of Communications Engineering

Phase

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

255

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

n 1

Butterworth filters are


popular because they
are the best
approximation to the
ideal, in the sense of
maximal flatness in the
filter passband.

256

Strategies for Eliminating ISI - 10

Avoiding ISI

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Nyquist suggested that the overall channel filter


transfer function (TF) must have a transition region

Use line code that is absolutely bandlimited


Cant actually do this (but can approximate)
Would require Sa(.) or sinc(.) pulse shape

Nyquist frequency response

Use a line code that is zero during adjacent sample


instants

Attn
Point of symmetry

It is ok for pulses to overlap somewhat, as long as there is no


overlap at the sample instants
Question: Is there pulse shapes that dont overlap during
adjacent sample instants?
Answer: Yes, e.g., Raised-Cosine Rolloff pulse

Frequency

1 1
fs
2 Ts

This TF should have a transition band between


passband & stopband and symmetric about a freq
equal to 0.5 x 1/Ts
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Use a filter at the receiver to undo the distortion


introduced by the channel
This is known as Equalization
257

Baseband Communication System Model - 1


Department of Communications Engineering

x(t)

Transmitter s(t)
HT(f)

Federal University of Technology, Minna

258

Baseband Communication System Model - 2


Department of Communications Engineering

Channel
HC(f)

r(t)

Receiver y(t)
HR(f)

Note that he(t) is the equivalent impulse response of the


receiving filter
To recover the information sequence {an}, the output y(t)
is sampled at t = kT, k = 0, 1, 2,
The sampled sequence is

t = kT

n(t)

hT(t) = Impulse response of the transmitter


hC(t) = Impulse response of the channel
hR(t) = Impulse response of the receiver

s(t ) anhT t nT , where Ts n


Tb
n

y (kT ) an he kT nT ne (kT )
n

T = k/Tb

yk an hk n nk ho a k

r (t ) an gT t nT n(t ) h(t ),

where g (t )=hT (t ) hC (t ), Ts

y ( t ) an he t nT ne (t )

1
fs

an hk n nk

n ,n k

Desired symbol scaled


by gain parameters ho

h0 is an arbitrary constant

ISI terms - effect of other symbols at


the sampling instants t = kT

where hk ho (kT ), nk no (kT ), k 0, 1, 2,

where he (t ) hT ( t ) hC (t ) hR (t ), ne (t ) n( t ) hR ( t ) hC ( t )
Federal University of Technology, Minna

noise term

or equivalently

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

259

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

260

Baseband Communication System Model - 3

Signal Design for Bandlimited Channel

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Generally, the optimum filter at the Rx is matched to


the received pulse he(t)
If the received signal is matched, then

Zero ISI
y (kT ) h a
o k

n ,n k

a h kT nT n (kT )
n e
e

To remove ISI, it is necessary and sufficient to make


the term he(kT - nT) = 0 for n k and h0 0
This means that

ho h 2 (t )dt

HR (f ) df HC (f ) HT (f ) df

By proper design of transmitting and receiving filters, it


is possible to satisfy the condition that he(kT - nT) = 0
for n k
This will eliminate the ISI term

RS
T

1, n 0
h (nT )
e
0, n 0

A pulse will produce zero ISI if it satisfies the following


condition:

h (t ) 0 at t kT k 0
e

Nyquist studied this problem many years ago


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

261

Nyquist first method for zero ISI - 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

262

Nyquist first method for zero ISI - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

A pulse will produce zero ISI at sampling instants if

Case I: Sampling at above Nyquist rate:

RS
T

1, n 0
h (nT )
e
0, n 0

H( f )

IK

n
H( f ) H f
T
e
n
T

2 fs

For channel bandwidth B, HC(f) 0, |f| > B and He(f) =


0 for |f| > B

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

I
K

H(f) consist of non-overlapping replicas separated by fs = 1/T

provided that its Fourier Transform satisfy

FH

F
H

1
1
or 2 B
2B
T

263

fs

B
B fs

fs

B fs

2 fs

In this case, elimination of ISI is not possible. Why?


we cannot design He(f) to ensure that H(f) T

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

264

Nyquist first method for zero ISI - 3

Nyquist first method for zero ISI - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

The smallest value of T for which transmission with zero


1
ISI is possible is T
2B

Case II: Sampling at Nyquist rate:

FH

IK

1
1
or 2 B
2B
T
In this case, the pulses touch and almost begin to overlap
T

Problems with Sa(.) or Sinc(.) function


It is not possible to create Sinc pulses due to

H( f )
2 fs

fs

1.Infinite time duration


2.Sharp transition band in the frequency domain

2 fs

fs

There exist one He(f) for which H(f) T


1
1
t
f
f B
H ( f ) 2B
h (t ) sin c

e
e
2B
T
2B
0,
f B

R|
S|
T

Sa(.) pulse shape can cause ISI in the presence of timing


errors

FH IK

FH IK

signal is not sampled at exactly the bit instant, then ISI will occur

We seek a pulse shape that

Pulse shape that satisfy this criteria is Sa(.) or Sinc(.)


function, e.g.,
t
h (t ) sin c
sin c 2 Bt
e
T

Has a more gradual transition in the frequency domain


Is more robust to timing errors
Yet still satisfies Nyquists first condition for zero ISI

FH IK

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

265

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Raised Cosine Pulse - 1

Nyquist first method for zero ISI - 5


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Case III: Sampling at below Nyquist rate

For fs > 2B, a particular pulse spectrum that has a desirable


spectral properties is the Raised Cosine (RC) spectrum
The following pulse shape satisfies Nyquists method for zero
ISI
t
sin t cos t
t cos T
T
T
h (t )
sin c
2 2
t
e
4 2 t 2
T 1 4 t
1

T
T2
T2
The Fourier Transform of this pulse shape is

F
H

1
1
or 2 B
2B
T

I
K

e j e j

In this case, pulses touch and overlap


H( f )
2 fs

fs

fs

2 fs

266

There are many He(f) for which H(f) T

R|T ,
|T L T 1 I O,
H ( f ) S M1 cos F f
e
|| 2 N H 2T K PQ
|T0,

FH IK e j

1
2T
1
1
f
2T
2T
1
f
2T
0 f

where is the roll-off factor that determines the bandwidth


(0 1)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

267

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

268

Raised Cosine Pulse - 2

Raised Cosine Pulse - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

BW occupied beyond 1/2T is called excess bandwidth (EB)


EB is usually expressed as a %tage of the Nyquist frequency,
e.g.,
= 1/2 ===> excess bandwidth is 50 %
= 1 ===> excess bandwidth is 100 %
RC filter is used to realized Nyquist filter since the transition
band can be changed using the roll-off factor
The sharpness of the filter is controlled by the parameter
When = 0 this corresponds to an ideal rectangular pulse
B occupied by a RC filtered signal is increased from its min
value
1
Bmin
2Ts

The Nyquist pulse shape can now be written as

to actual modulation bandwidth


Prof. Okey Ugweje

R|1,
1L
F a f f fIJ OP,
H ( f ) S M1 cosG
e
||T02,N H 2 f K Q
1

R|1,
F a f W 2W fIJ ,
H ( f ) Scos G
|T0, H 4 W W K
2

W - Wo

269

f1 f B

f1 2 f 0 B
f B f0

f B

Prof. Okey Ugweje

f 2W0 W
2W0 W f W
f W

Federal University of Technology, Minna

270

Raised Cosine Pulse - 5


Note that the bandwidth of a RC pulse shape is a
function of the bit rate and the rolloff factor

Rs
1

theoretical minimum BW
2 2T
W - Wo
= excess bandwidth, r =
rolloff factor, 0 r 1
Wo
absolute bandwidth, Wo

f1 2W0 W ,

f B f 0 , B f 0 f f 0 1 f 0 ( 1)
f
0

or solving for bit rate yields the expression

f W W0

A RC rolloff pulse shape is defined in this case by the rolloff


factor
W W0
f
r=
f0
W0

Rb

1.0
0.5

He ( f )

This means that to achieve zero ISI, it is necessary


sometimes to reduce the symbol rate below the Nyquist rate,
for practically realizable filters

f B f0 , f1 f0 f
Also see Fig. 3.17

f1
fo
B
Federal University of Technology, Minna

2B
1

This is the max transmitted bit rate when an RC pulse


shape with rolloff factor is used over a baseband
channel with bandwidth B

where fo is the 6 dB bandwidth of the pulse


f1 and f are related to the pulse bandwidth B (or W) as follows

f1

f f1

Department of Communications Engineering

Comparatively

fo
B
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Raised Cosine Pulse - 4

Rb
1

2 2T

This is equivalent to equation 3.78, p. 139 in your text

Department of Communications Engineering

where W

where f0

with Fourier Transform

B Bmin 1

Federal University of Technology, Minna

f LMN a f OPQ

cos(2f t )
h (t ) 2 f0 Sa 2f0 t
e
1 4 f t 2

271

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

272

Root RC rolloff Pulse Shaping

Raised Cosine Pulse - 6


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Later, we will show that the noise is minimized at the


receiver by using a matched filter
If the transmit filter is H(f), then the receive filter should
be H*(f)

The combination of transmit and receive filters must


satisfy Nyquists first method for zero ISI
H ( f ) H( f )H( f ) H( f ) H ( f )
e
e

Transmit filter with the above response is called the


root raised cosine-rolloff filter
Root RC rolloff pulse shapes are used in many
applications such as IS-54 and IS-136
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

273

Practical Issues with Pulse Shaping - 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

274

Practical Issues with Pulse Shaping - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Like the Sa(.) pulse, RC rolloff pulses extend infinitely in time


However, a very good approximation can be obtained by
truncating the pulse
Can make h(t) extend from -3Tb to +3Tb
RC rolloff pulses are less sensitive to timing errors than Sa(.)
pulses
Larger values of are more robust against timing errors
Sample Applications:
US Digital Cellular (IS-54/136) uses root RC rolloff pulse
shaping with = 0.35
IS-95 uses pulse shape that is slightly different from RC
rolloff shape
European GSM uses Gaussian shaped pulses

Implementation of Raised Cosine Pulse:


Can be digitally implemented with an FIR filter
Analog filters such as Butterworth filters may also
be used
Practical pulses must be truncated in time
Truncation leads to sidelobes - even in RC
pulses
Sometimes a square-root raised cosine spectrum
is used at Tx and Rx
This has to do with matched filtering

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

275

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

276

EYE Diagram - 1

EYE Diagram - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Effect of ISI and noise in digital communication can be


viewed on an oscilloscope from an eye diagram

ISI causes:
the eye to close thereby reducing the margin of error
distorts the position of the zero crossing, thereby causing the
system to be more sensitive to synchronization error

Effect of timing error is seen as a skewing of the eye diagram


and a closing of the eye due to the received symbol stream no
longer being sampled at the point of zero ISI

Width = time interval over which received signal can be sampled


Height = defines the noise margin of the system
Sensitivity to timing error = rate of closure of the eye
Diagram displays y(t) on vertical with horizontal sweep rate set to fs = 1/Ts
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

The addition of noise affects the timing recovery circuitry and also causes a
general closing of the eye
Noise may occasionally causes full 'eye-closure'
277

EYE Diagram - 3

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

278

Eye Diagrams for Raised Cosine Filtered Data - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

With no
bandwidth
limitation

Small :
As is reduced, the eye opening narrows, requiring the
accuracy of symbol timing to be even more exact
overshoot caused by filtering is greater for small
With
bandwidth
limitation

This increases the peak-to-mean ratio of the data energy


Increases peak signal handling requirement of the
modulator/demodulator

A benefits of small is greater bandwidth efficiency


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

279

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

280

Eye Diagrams for Raised Cosine Filtered Data - 2


Department of Communications Engineering

Digital Communication System


Department of Communications Engineering

Large :
Simpler filter
fewer stages (or taps), hence easier to implement with
less processing delay

Less signal overshoot, resulting in lower peak to mean


excursions of the transmitted signal
Less sensitivity to symbol timing accuracy wider eye
opening

= 0 corresponds to Sa(.) function

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

281

Controlled ISI

Controlling ISI
Partial Response Signaling
Duobinary Signaling

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

282

Partial Response Signaling (PRS) - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

To achieve zero ISI, we have seen that it is necessary to


transmit at below the Nyquist rate
Is it possible to relax condition on zero ISI and allow for
some amount of ISI in order to achieve fs > 2B?
The idea behind this is to introduce some controlled
amount of ISI instead of trying to eliminate it
ISI that we introduce is deterministic (or controlled) and
hence we can take care of it at the receiver
How do we do this?

A.k.a Doubinary signaling, Correlative coding, Polybinary


PRS is a technique that deliberately introduces some
amounts of ISI into the transmitted signal in order to ease the
burden on the pulse-shaping filters
It removes the need to strive at achieving Nyquist filtering
conditions, and high rolloff factors
This strategy involves two key operation
Correlative filtering
Digital precoding
Correlated filtering purposely introduces some ISI, resulting
in a pulse train with higher & correlated amplitude sequences
Nyquist rate no longer applies since the correlated
symbols are no longer independent
Hence higher signaling rate can be used

Controlled amount of ISI is introduced by combining a


number of successive binary pulses prior to transmission
Since the combination is done in a known way, the receiver
can be designed to correctly recover the signal
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

283

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

284

Partial Response Signaling (PRS) - 2

Partial Response Signaling (PRS) - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Digital
Precoding

ak

a' k

Department of Communications Engineering

Impulse
Generator

x(t )

H(f)

y(t )

Regenerator

Since h(t) = sinc(t/T) and R=1/T, the overall impulse


response is

ak

FH

x (t ) ak t kT

y(t ) ak h t kT , where h(t ) F 1 H ( f )

and

RS
T

The transfer function H(f) is equivalent to the Tap


Delay line
T

x(t )
C0

C1

T
Cn-2

FH

N
t
y(t ) a c sin c n k
k k n0 n
T

IK UV ak sin cFH t kIK


T
W
k

where
Cn

Cn-1

a k co ak c1ak 1 c N ak N cn ak n
N

n0

+
LPF @
B = R/2

Prof. Okey Ugweje

IK

N
t
h(t ) c sin c n
n
n 0
T

y(t )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

285

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

286

Duobinary Signaling - 1

Partial Response Signaling (PRS) - 4


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Partial Response signaling changes the amplitude


sequence ak a+k
a+k has a correlated amplitude span of N symbols
since each a+k depends on the previous N values of ak
Also, when ak has M levels, a+k sequence has M+ > M
levels
A whole family of Partial Response Signaling (PRS)
methods exists
Lets look at a few specific cases of PRS

Simplest form of PRS with M = 2, N = 1, Co = C1 = 1


Input sequence is combined with a 1-bit delayed
version of itself and then pulse-shaped
Duobinary Encoder

lx k q

yk

+
Delay
T

xk

He ( f )

H1

RS1,
T0,

xk 1

1
2T

1
2T

t kT

H2

1
2T

1
2T

if symbol a k = 1
if symbol a k = 0

yk xk xk 1
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

287

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

288

Duobinary Signaling - 2

Duobinary Signaling - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Each incoming pulse is added to the previous pulse


The bit or data sequence {yk} are not independent
Each yk digit caries with it the memory of the prior
digit
It is this correlation between digit that is considered
the controlled ISI which can be easily removed at
the receiver
Impulse Response of Duobinary Signal:

RST,
T0,

RS
T

it can be shown that (exercise show this)

289

Prof. Okey Ugweje

290

Duobinary Signaling - 5
Department of Communications Engineering

Impulse response h(t) for the duobinary scheme is


simply the sum of two sinc waveforms, delayed by one
bit period w.r.t each other:
He ( f )

arg H e ( f )

1
2T

Amplitude Response

1
2T

The role of the receiver is to recover xk from yk

1
2T

Duobinary Decoding:
yk

yk
2

xk

a A, 0, Af

+
xk1 -

Delay
T

Duobinary Decoder

Transmitted signal (assuming no noise) is yk xk xk 1


xk can assume one of 2 values A, depending on
whether the k-th bit is 1 or 0
Since yk depends on xk and xk-1, yk can have 3 values
(no noise)

Phase Response

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Decision
Circuit

t kT

Duobinary signaling can be interpreted as adjacent


pulse summation followed by rectangular low pass
filtering
Encoder takes a 2 level waveform and produces a 3
level waveform
Prof. Okey Ugweje

e j

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Duobinary Signaling - 4

He ( f ) T e jfT e jfT e jfT

ej

Department of Communications Engineering

1
2T

he (t )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

From

f 21T
otherwise

Prof. Okey Ugweje

sin(t / T ) sin( (t T ) / T ) sin(t / T ) sin(t / T )

t / T
(t T ) / T
t / T
(t T ) / T
t
t T T 2 sin(t / T )
sin c
sin c

T
T
t(T t)

H1 ( f ) 1 e j 2fT
H2 ( f )

He ( f ) H1( f )H2 ( f ) 1 e j 2fT T T e jfT e jfT e jfT


jfT
, f 21T
2T cos(fT )e
else
0,

291

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

292

Duobinary Signaling - 6

Duobinary Signaling - 7

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

In general, (M-ary transmission), PRS results in 2M1 output levels

R|2 A,
y S0,
k
|T2 A,

if the kth and (k -1)th bits are 1's

The detection process is the reverse of the transmitter


process
Major drawback
once errors are made, they tend to propagate through the
system

if the kth and (k -1)th bits are different


if the kth and (k -1)th bits are 0's

Detection involves subtracting xk-1 decisions from yk


digits such that
Decision rules is
xk yk xk 1

H1

lx k q

+
Delay
T

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Decision
Circuit

xk 1

xk

xk 1

Delay
T

Duobinary Decoder

A Duo-binary Baseband System

293

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Duobinary Signaling - 8

Federal University of Technology, Minna

294

Duobinary Signaling - 9

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Advantage:
Duobinary signaling permits transmission at the
Nyquist rate without the need for linear phase,
rectangular shaped LPF
Disadvantages:
There is no one-to-one mapping between the
original binary digits and detected ternary symbol
(2 3)
Require more power
Ternary nature of duobinary signal requires about
3 dB greater SNR compared to ideal signaling
(i.e, binary) for a given PB
Prof. Okey Ugweje

y k

yk
t kT

Duobinary Encoder

0, decide that xk opposite of previous xk


y k
2, decide that xk 1
Prof. Okey Ugweje

LPF

Federal University of Technology, Minna

295

Decoding process, xk = yk-xk-1, results in errors


propagation, Why?
output data bits are decoded using previous data
bit. If previous bit is in error, then the new output
will be in error, and so on
i.e., errors will propagate through the system
It is ineffective for AC coupled signal
AC coupling means that zero and low fred. data
are rejected
The PSD has substantial values at zero making it
unsuitable for AC coupled transmission
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

296

Duobinary Signaling - 10

Duobinary Signaling - 11

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Note:
Problem 3 can be solved with a technique known
as precoding
Problem 4 can be solved with a technique known
as modified duobinary

Duobinary Transfer
Function and pulse
shape
(a) Cosine Filter
(b) Impulse
response of the
cosine filter

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

297

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Duobinary Signaling - 12

298

Duobinary Signaling - 13

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Composite pulses arising from like and unlike


combinations of input impulse pair
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Duobinary waveform arising from an example binary


sequence
299

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

300

Duobinary Precoding - 1

Duobinary Precoding - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

A precoder consist of an exclusive-OR gate &


feedback through a one unit delay

The basic idea of precoding is that from the data


sequence {xk}, a new sequence {wk} (precoded
sequence) is generated
Unlike basic duobinary, precoding is nonlinear
The transmitted signal amplitude

wk

xk
wk1

Duo-binary
Encoder

yk

wk xk wk 1

Delay
T

1, if either xk or wk 1 is 1
w
k 0, otherwise

Conversion
rule

xk

wk-1

wk

wk+wk-1

RS
T

ak 1, if wk 0
y
ak 2 w k 1
k
ak 1,
if wk 1

At the receiver, the decoding decision rule is:

The binary stream wk is applied to the input of the


duobinary filter with output yk
yk wk wk 1

wk
Delay
T

yk wk wk 1
x w

wk1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

k 1

0, decide that xk 1
yk
2, decide that xk 0
0, if yk 2
i.e, x
xk 1 yk 1 mod 2
k 1, if yk 0
2

hw

k 1

Federal University of Technology, Minna

301

Summary of Duobinary Baseband System - 1


Department of Communications Engineering

+
Delay
T

LPF

y k

yk

Decision
Circuit

xk 1

Duobinary Encoder

Summary of Duobinary Baseband System - 2

Delay
T

Duobinary Decoder

if the kth and (k -1)th bits are 1's


if the kth and (k -1)th bits are different

k 1

0, decide that xk xk 1 opposite of prior decoded value


y k
2, decide that xk 1

Decision rules if precoding is used


y k

if the kth and (k -1)th bits are 0's

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Decision rules is

In general, (M-ary transmission), PRS results in 2M-1 output


levels

Prof. Okey Ugweje

302

Detection involves subtracting xk-1 decisions from yk


digits such that x y x

xk

t kT

xk 1

R|2 A,
y S0,
k
|T2 A,

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Department of Communications Engineering

H1

lx k q

Prof. Okey Ugweje

303

Prof. Okey Ugweje

RS 0,
T2,

decide that xk 0
decide that xk 1

Federal University of Technology, Minna

304

Modified Duobinary Signaling - 1


Department of Communications Engineering

Modified Duobinary Signaling - 2


H ( f ) H ( f )H ( f ) b1 e
gT Tbe e ge
R2 jT sin(2fT )e , f
S
else
T0,

Department of Communications Engineering

Also called class 4 signaling


Problem #4 (i.e, large DC value of duobinary PSD) can
be addressed by this signaling techniques
The encoder involves a two-bit delay, causing the ISI to
spread over two symbols (correlation span of 2 binary
H1
T
digits)
y

lxk q

Delay
2T

+
-

1
2T

xk2

From

Prof. Okey Ugweje

|ST ,
|T 0,

j 2fT

j 2fT

1
2T

it can be shown that (exercise show this)


sin(t / T ) sin( (t 2T ) / T )

t / T
(t 2 T ) / T
sin(t / T )
sin(t / T )

t / T
(t 2 T ) / T

he (t )

H2

H2 ( f )

j 2fT

He ( f ) T e j 2fT e j 2fT e j 2fT

Here again, we find that a 3 level signal is generated


Similarly
1
R
H1 ( f ) 1 e j 4fT

j 4fT

j 2fT

yk xk xk 2

1
2T

2T
otherwise

2T 2 sin(t / T )
t (2T t )

Spectrum shows a null @ zero but is still strictly bandlimited to 1/2T

Federal University of Technology, Minna

305

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

306

Characterization of PRS Systems - 1

Modified Duobinary Signaling - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Similar to basic duobinary, error propagation


necessitates the use of a precoding which is
implemented in a similar manner

For consistency, lets characterize the PRS systems

xk

wk 2

Delay
2T

wk

xk

xk

H1

yk
Delay
2T

wk

yk

duo
Mod.duo

wk

y k

x k

xk

1
2T

1
2T

xk 2

yk

wk

1, Duobinary
2, Modified Duobinary

H2

T , Duobinary
D
2T , Modified Duobinary

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

307

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

308

Characterization of PRS Systems - 2

Characterization of PRS Systems - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Duobinary:

Modified Duobinary:

a) Without Precoding: (wk = xk)

a) Without Precoding: (wk = xk)

yk xk xk 1
Decode : xk y k xk 1

Code :

1,
Output sequence : xk
0,

b) With Precoding:
Code : wk xk wk 1

Code : wk xk wk 2

yk wk wk 2 xk wk 2 wk 2

1, if y k 0
Decode xk
0, if y k 2
Federal University of Technology, Minna

y k 1
else

b) With Precoding:

yk wk wk 1 xk wk 1 wk 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

yk xk xk 2
xk yk xk 2

Code :
Decode :

Decode :
309

1, if y k 2
xk
0, if y k 0

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Examples

310

Multipath Channels - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Example: (Duobinary Coding)

Have already seen that bandlimited channel induce ISI


A good strategy was to pick a pulse shape that was
bandlimited and thus was not distorted by the
channel
It is also possible for a channel that is not bandlimited
to cause ISI, e.g., the multipath channel

Example: (Duobinary Coding)


Find the output sequence of duobinary signaling
system if the input data sequence is 1 1 0 0 0 1 0 1
00111
a) without precoding, b) with precoding

Antenna
Gain Pattern

Transmitter

Example: (Duobinary Coding)


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Direct Ray

Difused
Component

Specular
Component

Receiver

hc (t) (t 1 ) (t 2 )
311

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

312

Multipath Channels - 2

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

If the direct path has time delay 1 and the reflected


path has time delay 2 (2 > 1) then the impulse
response of the channel is

H c ( f ) F (t 1 ) (t 2 ) e j 2 f 1 e j 2 f 2
The channels frequency response

Equalization

A plot of the magnitude response will not be flat!


Because the magnitude response is not flat, the signal
will undergo distortion, possibly resulting in ISI
It is therefore possible to encounter ISI even when the
channel itself has an infinite bandwidth

So, how do we handle this problem?


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

313

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Equalization - 1

Federal University of Technology, Minna

314

Equalization - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Nyquist filtering and pulse shaping schemes assumes


that the channel is precisely known and its
characteristics do not change with time
However, in practice we encounter channels whose
frequency response are either unknown or change
with time

Examples of time-varying channels are radio channels


These channels are characterized by time-varying
frequency response characteristics
To compensate for channel induced ISI and other
distortions, we use a process known as Equalization
a technique of correcting the frequency response of
the channel
The filter used to perform such a process is called an
equalizer

e.g., each time we dial a phone #, the communication


channel will be different because the communication
route will be different
But, when connection is made, the channel becomes
time-invariant (land line only)
The characteristics of such channels are not known a
priori
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Transmiter
hT(t)

Channel
hC(t)

Receiver
hR(t)

Equalizer
hEQ(t)

Noise
n(t)
315

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

316

Equalization - 3

Problems with Equalization

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Since HR(f) is matched to HT(f), we usually worry


about HC(f)
Goal is to pick the frequency response Heq(f) of the
equalizer such that

1. It can be difficult to determine the inverse of the channel


response
If the channel response is zero at any frequency, then the
inverse is not defined at that frequency
Rx generally does not know what the channel response is

H c ( f ) H eq ( f ) 1 H eq ( f )

with amplitude
H eq ( f )

1
j ( f )
e c
Hc ( f )

Channel changes in real time, so realistic equalization must be


adaptive

2. The equalizer can have an infinite impulse response even if


the channel has a finite impulse response
The impulse response of the equalizer must usually be
truncated
3. The equalizer can actually enhance the noise in the channel
Nonlinear equalization techniques are available that
minimize the amount of noise enhancement

1
Hc ( f )

and phase
eq ( f ) c ( f )
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

317

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

318

Linear Transversal Equalizer - 1

Equalization Techniques or Structures


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Three Basic Equalization Structures


Linear Transversal Filter

This is simply a linear filter with adjustable parameters


Parameters are adjusted on the basis of the measurement of
channel characteristics
A common choice for implementation is the transversal filter
(Tap Delay Line (TDL)) or the FIR filter with adjustable tap
coefficient
xk

Simple implementation using Tap Delay Line or FIR filters


FIR filter has guaranteed stability (although adaptive
algorithm which determines coefficients may still be
unstable)

Decision Feedback Equalizer

k 1

Extra step in subtracting estimated residual error from


signal

C-N

C-N+1

CN-2

CN-1

Maximal Likelihood Sequence Estimator (Viterbi)


Optimal performance
High complexity and implementation problem (not heavily
used)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

CN

319

yk

Algorithm for
coefficient adjustment

Total number of taps = 2N+1


Total delay = 2NT = 2N
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

320

Linear Transversal Equalizer - 3

Linear Transversal Equalizer - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

N is chosen sufficiently large so that equalizer spans


length of the ISI
Assuming the ISI is limited to a finite # of samples, say
L, then 2N+1 > L
Output yk of the equalizer in response to the input
sequence {xk} is

Ideally, we would like the equalizer to eliminate ISI


resulting in

yk cn xk n ,

yk

Prof. Okey Ugweje

k 2 N , , 2 N

Federal University of Technology, Minna

yk

RS1,
T0,

k0
k 1, 2,, N

There are two types of such equalizer (i.e., linear


equalizers)

321

Linear Transversal Equalizer - 4

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

322

Linear Transversal Equalizer - 5

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Preset Equalizer:
Transmits a training sequence that is compared at the
receiver with a locally generated sequence
Requires an initial training sequence
Differences between sequences are used to update the
coefficient cn
Time varying channel can change the sequence, since
the coefficients are fixed

Adaptive Equalizer:
Equalizer adjust itself periodically during transmission of
data
The tap weights constitute the adaptive filter coefficient
Prof. Okey Ugweje

k0
k0

But this cannot be achieved


However, the tap gains can be chosen such that

n N

where cn is the weight of the nth tap

RS1,
T0,

Federal University of Technology, Minna

323

The 2 techniques can be combined into a robust


equalizer
In this case, there are two modes of operation
Training Mode
For the training mode, a known sequence is
transmitted and a synchronized version is
generated at the receiver
Decision-Directed Mode
When training mode is complete, the adaptive
algorithm is switched on
The tap weights are then adjusted with info from
training mode
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

324

Linear Transversal Equalizer - 7

Linear Transversal Equalizer - 6

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

The impulse response of the transversal filter is

Nyquist zero ISI condition implies that


yk y (kT )

heq (t ) cn (t n )

N
1, k 0
cn x kT n
n N
0, k 1, 2, , N

n N

H eq ( f ) cn e j 2 fn
N

n N

If x(t) is the signal pulse corresponding to

Since there are 2N+1 coefficients, we may express in


matrix form as

X ( f ) = HT ( f ) HC ( f ) H R ( f )

y xc

then the equalized output signal is

where

y(t ) c x (t n )
n N n

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

x = (2N+1) (2N+1) matrix with elements x(kT - n)


c = (2N+1) column coefficient vector
y = (2N+1) column vector
325

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Linear Transversal Equalizer - 8

Survey of Equalizers

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Since this design forces the ISI to be zero at sampling


instants t = kT, the equalizer is called Zero-Forcing
Equalizer (ZFE)
Thus we obtain a set of (2N+1) linear equations for
ZFE
In the figure, is chosen as high as T
= T Symbol-spaced equalizer;
< T Fractional-spaced equalizer

Equalizer

Types

Federal University of Technology, Minna

327

Linear

Nonlinear

ML Symbol
Detector

DFE

Structures

Algorithms

Prof. Okey Ugweje

326

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Transversal

Lattice

Zero Forcing
LMS
RLS
Fast RLS
Square Root RLS

Transversal

Gradient RLS

Lattice

LMS
Gradient RLS
RLS
Fast RLS
Square Root RLS

Federal University of Technology, Minna

MLSE

Transversal
Channel Estimator

LMS
RLS
Fast RLS
Square Root RLS

328

Examples: (Equalizer/Equalization)

Decision Feedback Equalizer

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Example: Equalization

A Decision-Feedback Equalizer (DFE) is a nonlinear equalizer


that employs previous decisions to eliminate the ISI caused by
previously detected symbol
It consists of a feed forward section a feedback section and a
detector connected together as shown

Problem

Example: Equalizer/Equalization

Input from
matched
filter

Example: Equalization

Feedforward
Filter

zm

+
-

Feedback
Filter

Example: Equalizer/Equalization
Problem

output
data

Detector

z m

The filters are usually fractionally spaced FIR with adjustable tap coefficients
The detector is a symbol-by-symbol detector
Note
self study

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

329

Maximum Likelihood Sequence Detector (MLSD)


Department of Communications Engineering

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

330

Digital Communication System


Department of Communications Engineering

This technique provides an algorithm for searching through the trellis for the
ML signal path
A trellis is a schematic used to represent signal waveforms with memory,
e.g., the trellis for duobinary PRS is given by
1/2

-1

1/2
1

t0

0
1

tT

1/2
new data bit/received signal level

Module 3

0
1

t 2T

t 3T

For binary, this trellis contains 2 states corresponding to 2 possible input values
Since the duobinary have memory of length L = 1, the number of states is S = 2L
In general, for M-ary, the number of trellis states is S = ML
Maximum Likelihood Sequence Detector selects the most probable path through
the trellis upon observing the received sequence y(kT)
In general each node in the trellis will have M incoming paths and M metrics
Search through the trellis for the minimum distance may be performed sequentially
using Viterbi algorithm - beyond the scope of this class!

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

331

Baseband Communication System

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

332

Noise on Communication Systems

Digital Communication System


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

In the process of communication, noise arises in


various forms
m(t) is corrupted in the transmitter by thermal noise due
to the presence of electronic devices (e.g., Audio
Amplifier)
c(t) is not a pure sine wave - in fact, it contains
harmonic distortions
s(t) experiences multiplicative noise in the process of
being transmitted thru the channel due to turbulence in
the air, reflection, refractions, multipath etc.
s(t) also suffers from additive noise during transmission
(passing automobiles, static electricity, lightning, power
lines, sunspots, etc)
thermal and short noise at the receiver

Noise in Communication System


n(t)
x(t)

yi(t)

s(t)
Transmitter

input
m(t)

Prof. Okey Ugweje

PT

Channel

y0(t)
Receiver

Si, Ni

output
S0, N0

Federal University of Technology, Minna

333

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Noise Modeling - 1

Federal University of Technology, Minna

334

Noise Modeling - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

All these different noise components degrade the


performance of communications system
Among these types of noise, the additive noise is the
most annoying
usually contains most power and is of most interest
in many applications

In the channel, the signal experience attenuation, time


delay (precisely known) and additive noise

Transmitter

Channel

(modulated signal ) s(t)

Receiver
r(t) (received signal )

Most disturbances, interference, attenuation, etc., are


usually classified as noise
The most important type of noise that occur in
communications system is said to be white noise,
n(t)
Usually n(t) is assumed to be Additive, White and a
Gaussian Noise (AWGN) with power spectral density
Gn(f)

n(t)
(noise)

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

335

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

336

White Noise and Filtered Noise - 1

White Noise and Filtered Noise - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

White Noise is a random process having a flat


(constant) power spectral density Gn(f), over the entire
frequency range

This type of noise is wideband and cannot be expressed


in terms of quardrature components
However, in most communications systems operating at
carrier frequency fc, the bandwidth of the channel B (or
W), is small compared to fc narrowband systems
In such situations, it is mathematically convenient to
represent the white noise process in terms of the
quadrature components

white because it is analogous to white light


assumed to be a Gaussian random process
Gn (f)
usually additive in nature

N0
2

2-sided power spectral density of noise

Hence this type of noise is commonly called Additive,


White and Gaussian (AWGN) with power spectral
density such that G ( f ) N 0
n

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Accomplished by passing signal plus noise at the receiving


terminal through an ideal BPF having a passband as
Gn (f)

-fc

Federal University of Technology, Minna

337

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

338

y0 (t ) s0 (t ) no (t )
Assume that:

n(t)
x(t)

yi(t)

s(t)
Transmitter

PT

Channel

Si, Ni

Noise n(t) is zero-mean Gaussian with PSD Gn(f) = N0/2 or


/2

y0(t)
Receiver

output
S0, N0

A certain signal m(t) (or x(t)) is transmitted with power PT


s(t) is corrupted by additive noise n(t) during transmission
Channel may also attenuate (and/or distort) the signal
At receiver, we have a signal mixed with noise
Signal and noise power at the receiver input are Si and Ni
Receiver processes the signal (filters, demodulation, etc.)
to yield the desired signal power So, plus noise power No
Prof. Okey Ugweje

fc

Department of Communications Engineering

SNR is the figure of merit for evaluating the performance


of analog communications systems

m(t)

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) - 2

Signal-to-Noise Ratio (SNR) - 1


Department of Communications Engineering

input

N0
2

Federal University of Technology, Minna

339

Noise is uncorrelated with s(t)


Hence output power is
E y02 (t ) E s02 (t ) E n02 (t )
S0 N 0

The output signal-to-noise ratio (SNR) is


SNR0
Prof. Okey Ugweje

E s 2 (t )
S0 S
02
N 0 N 0 E n0 (t )
Federal University of Technology, Minna

340

Baseband System Model - 1

Baseband System Model - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

In baseband systems, signal is transmitted w/o modulation


and we also assume that channel is distortionless, hence

Assumes:

x0 t x0 t td

This mode of communication is used in short-haul links


over a pair of wires or coaxial cable
Although this mode of communication is not widely used,
their study is important because many of the basic
concepts can be carried over to modulated systems
Also, baseband systems are used as benchmark for
comparing the performance of analog systems
LPF

m(t)

ST

Hp(f )

input

Channel
HC ( f )

Si

LPF

So

Ni

Hd ( f )

N0

n(t ) Noise

limits m(t)

Si PT N , where N 2 0 Gn ( f )df
B

Signal-to-noise ratio is then given as


SNR Mean Signal Power So
No
Noise Power
Therefore, for a baseband system,

y D (t )

S
S
SNR i
N b N 0 B b

eliminates outof-band noise

A baseband Communication System Model


Prof. Okey Ugweje

m(t) is zero-mean, wide sense stationary random


process bandlimited to B Hz
Assume that the channel is distortionless with unit gain,

Federal University of Technology, Minna

341

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

With Gain - 1
Department of Communications Engineering

S 0 Si

n(t )
gT

ST

SX

Channel
L

xR (t )
SR

gR

LPF

x0 (t ) n0 (t )
S0 N 0

Receiver

ST gT x 2 gT S X

S R xR2

ST
L

S0 x02 g R S R

N 0 output g R N 0 B

S SR

N o N 0 B

Receiver output SNR does not depend on the gain, gR


However, channel gain or losses will affect the output

N 0 E n02 (t ) B Gn ( f )df B N20 df N 0 B


B

Therefore

S S 0 Si

N 0 N 0 B

Larger value of SNR is desirable


This can be achieved by simply increasing PT
However, this is usually not possible since in practice,
(PT)max is limited by other considerations such as
FCC (NCC) rule; transmitter cost; channel capacity;
interference with other channels, and so on

In practice, it is more convenient to deal with received


signal power Si instead of PT

S ST

N o LN 0 B
Prof. Okey Ugweje

342

With Gain - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

x(t )

This is used as a
standard for making
comparisons of the
various analog
modulation schemes

Federal University of Technology, Minna

343

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

344

Binary Signal Transmission - 1

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

In a binary commun. system, binary data (0s, 1s) are


transmitted by means of 2 signal waveform s0(t) & s1(t)
0 s0(t), 0 t Tb
where Tb = 1/Rb
1 s1(t), 0 t Tb
Assumptions:
data bits 0 & 1 are equally probable (each has
probability 0.5)
0 and 1 are mutually independent
The channel corrupts the signal by adding noise,
denoted by n(t)
n(t) is assumed to be Additive White Gaussian
Noise with PSD N0/2 W/Hz

Detection of Binary Signal in


Gaussian Noise

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

345

Binary Signal Transmission - 2

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

346

Detection of Binary Signal in Gaussian Noise - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

The received signal waveform is expressed as


r(t) = si(t) + n(t), i = 0, 1; 0 t Tb
Receiver is to determine whether a 0 or a 1 was
transmitted

si (t )

r (t )

n(t )

h(t)

z(t )

z(T )

t T

H1

si (t )
H0

(AWGN)

Recovery of signal at the receiver consist of 2 parts


Signal correlator or Matched filter
reduces received signal to a single variable z(T)
z(T) is called the test statistics

Analysis that follow will assume that the filtering


operation is linear
linear input linear output
Gaussian output
Gaussian input

Detector (or decision circuit)


compares the z(T) to some threshold level 0, i.e.,

z (T )

H
1

H
0

where H1 and H0 are the two possible binary hypothesis


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

347

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

348

Detection of Binary Signal in Gaussian Noise - 2

Maximum Likelihood Detector (MLD) - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Signal correlator and detector processes are


independent
Once r(t) is transformed to z(T), the shape of the
waveform is no longer important

The concept of maximum likelihood detector is based


on Statistical Decision Theory
It allows us to

This means that any kind of transmitter waveform


transforms to z(T) for detection purposes

Hence, detection for baseband and bandpass are the


same
A particular detector that minimizes the probability of
error is known as the maximum likelihood detector
That is, it minimizes the cost of making an error

Prof. Okey Ugweje

formulate hypothesis that characterizes the transmission


test the hypothesis
formulate the decision rule that operates on the data
optimize the detection criterion

The formulation of this topic requires the knowledge of


probability (in particular Bayes rules) and random
variables
For a binary data stream there are two types of decision
Soft decision (multi-level)
Hard decision (2 level)

Federal University of Technology, Minna

349

Maximum Likelihood Detector (MLD) - 2

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

350

Maximum Likelihood Detector (MLD) - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Hard decision is more common than soft decision

Each soft decision contains


Information about the most likely transmitted signal
000 to 011 0
100 to 111 1
Information about the likelihood of a decision
Soft decisions are converted to hard decisions by
some algorithm
Let T be the length of time it takes to transmit one bit
of data

Decides immediately whether the signal is 0 or 1


Uses either Bayes decision criterion or Newman-Pearson
criterion
Matched
Filter

S&H

8-level 3-bit
quantization

Combined Soft decision/


error control decoding

soft decision

hard decision

a) Soft decision Receiver


Matched
Filter

S&H

Binary
quantization

Error control
hard decision

b) Hard decision Receiver


Digital 0

Digital 1

000 010 100 110


000 010 100 110
0
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

s (t ), 0 t T for a binary 0
s (t ) 0
s1 (t ), 0 t T for a binary 1

soft decision
hard decision
351

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

352

Maximum Likelihood Detector (MLD) - 4

Maximum Likelihood Detector (MLD) - 5

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

At the output of the demodulator

z(T) is known as decision variable or test statistics


and it is a random process corrupted by noise
Assume that pdf of z0(T) and z1(T) are Gaussian with
equal likelihood, and with 0 = a0, 1 = a1

z (t ) a0 (t ) n(t ), 0 t T for a binary 0


z (t ) 0
z1 (t ) a1 (t ) n(t ), 0 t T for a binary 1
where ai(t) is the signal component & noise n is zero mean
Gaussian

Region 0
Likelihood of s0

Decision
Line

P[z|s0 sent]

At the sampling instant t = T


z (T ) a0 (T ) n(T ), 0 t T for a binary 0
z (T ) 0
z1 (T ) a1 (T ) n(T ), 0 t T for a binary 1

p(z| s0 )

353

Maximum Likelihood Detector (MLD) - 6

Prof. Okey Ugweje

P[z|s1 sent]

a0
Pe(s0)

L F IO
expM 1 G z a J P
2
N 2H K Q
2

p(z| s1)

Minimum error criterion


Federal University of Technology, Minna

a0

For simplicity we will drop the index such that z = ai + n

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Region 1
Likelihood of s1

0 a0 a1 0

Federal University of Technology, Minna

354

Maximum Likelihood Detector (MLD) - 7


Department of Communications Engineering

This is an averaging operation


It makes sense because the logical point is halfway
between the two voltage levels representing each
symbol
Questions:
How do we implement this averaging operation?
How do we choose the threshold, 0?
Hypothesis:
H0: r(t) = s0(t) + n(t) 0 sent
H1: r(t) = s1(t) + n(t) 1 sent

Definitions of Probabilities:
P[s0], P[s1] a priori probabilities
These probabilities are known before transmission

P[z]
probability of the received sample

p(z|s0), p(z|s1)
conditional pdf of received signal z, conditioned on the class si

P[s0|z], P[s1|z] a posteriori probabilities


After examining the sample, we make a refinement of our previous
knowledge

P[s1|s0], P[s0|s1]
wrong decision (error)

P[s1|s1], P[s0|s0]
Federal University of Technology, Minna

IJ OP
KQ

Department of Communications Engineering

Prof. Okey Ugweje

LM F
N GH

1 exp 1 z a1

1 2
2 1

355

Prof. Okey Ugweje

correct decision

Federal University of Technology, Minna

356

Types of Decision Rules - 1

Maximum Likelihood Detector (MLD) - 8


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Decision Rule:

H1

z(T )

H0

zi (t )

Acquiring information at the receiver about the transmitted


signal involves making decisions
We must decide which of the set of hypothesis best
describes the received signal
This involves uncertain (error in judgment)
If the signals we are trying to detect do not overlap, we
can make a decision without error
On the contrary, we need some rules to help classify the
received signal once they fall in the overlap region
A set of rules known as decision rules allow us to decide
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

357

Types of Decision Rules - 2

1. Bayes decision criterion:


It formulates the problem of making a decision
under conditions of uncertainty by selecting the
hypothesis with the greatest a posteriori probability
This scheme assumes that some errors are more
costly than others
Hence, it assigns cost (weighting factors) that
reflect the risk involved
This is the most widely applied decision rule in
communications

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

358

Types of Decision Rules - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

2. Maximum a posteriori (MAP) criterion:


Decide that the received signal belongs to the class
with the maximum a posteriori probabilities, i.e.,
maximize P(si|z)
It equivalently examines the pdf conditioned on
each signal class (p(z|s0), p(z|s1)) and choose the
maximum
For the received signal za, the likelihood that za
belongs to s1 or s2 corresponds to the circled point
on the pdf
The decision criterion is based on the likelihood of
P[z|si], i = 0,

3. Newman-Pearson (N-P) criterion


Makes no assumption on the a priori source
statistics (requires only a posteriori probabilities)
Widely used in pulse detection in Gaussian noise as
in Radar applications where the source probabilities
(presence or absence of a target) is unknown
fix probability of false alarm
minimize probability of error
maximize probability of correct decision

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

359

Federal University of Technology, Minna

360

Types of Decision Rules - 4

Bayes Decision Criterion - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

4. Min-max criterion
Also in this criterion, the a priori probability is not
known
Since P(H1) is unknown, the rule maximizes the risk
with respect to P(H1) and minimizes the risk with
respect to P(H0)

Recall that the Bayes equation is given by


P[ si | z ]

where

P[ z | si ]P[ si ]
, i 0, 2, , M 1
P[ z ]
M

P[ z ] P[ z | si ]P[ si ]
i 1

Recall from probability theory that

P[ si | z ]P[ z ] p ( z | si ) P[ si ]

In communications, we can interpret the Bayes


equation as a description of an experiment involving
a received sample, and
a statistical knowledge of the signal classes to
which the received sample may belong
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

361

Bayes Decision Criterion - 2

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Bayes Decision Criterion - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

That is,
si denote the ith transmitted signal class from a set
of M classes
zj denotes the jth sample of the received signal
Hence, we can write the Bayes equation in terms of
the pdf

By examining a particular received sample zj, it is


possible to find likelihood that zj belongs to class si

P[ si | z ]

362

p ( z | si ) P[ si ]
, i 0, 2, , M 1
p( z )

This means that after the experiment, we will refine our


knowledge by computing the a posteriori probability

Note that the terms a priori and a posteriori imply


cause to effect and effect to cause, respectively
Assume that
Pdf of z0(T) and z1(T) are Gaussian with equal
likelihood, having mean values of a0 and a1 respectively
a0 and a1 are mutually independent
Noise n0 is independent zero mean AWGN with PSD No

where
M

p ( z ) p ( z | si ) P[ si ]
i 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

363

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

364

Bayes Decision Criterion - 4

Bayes Decision Criterion - 5

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

In this case, for binary signal

L( z )

P[ s1 | z ] P[ s0 | z ] decision rule

The right-hand side (RHS) is called the likelihood ratio


When the two signals, s0(t) and s1(t), are equally likely,
i.e., P[s0] = P[s1] = 0.5, then the decision rule becomes

p ( z | s1 ) P[ s1 ] p ( z | s0 ) P[ s0 ]
p ( z | s1 ) P[ s1 ] p ( z | s0 ) P[ s0 ]

p( z )
p( z )
L( z )

p ( z | s1 ) P[ s0 ]
likelihood ratio test (LRT)
p ( z | s0 ) P[ s1 ]

L( z )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

365

Bayes Decision Criterion - 6

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

366

Department of Communications Engineering

Substituting the pdfs

Taking the log of both sides will give

1 z a
0
exp

0 2
2 0
1 z a 2
1
1
H1 : p ( z | s1 )
exp

1 2

2
1
1
1
2
exp 2 ( z a1 )
p ( z | s1 )
2
2 1

L( z )
1 1
1
1
p ( z | s0 )
1 ( z a )2
exp 2 0
0 2
2 0

ln{L( z )}

z (a1 a0 ) a12 a02 (a1 a0 )(a1 a0 )

2 02
02
2 02

2 (a a )(a a )
z 0 12 0 1 0

2 0 (a1 a0 )
(a1 a0 )
z
0

z (a a ) (a 2 a 2 )
exp 1 2 0 1 2 0 1
2 0
0
Federal University of Technology, Minna

z (a1 a0 ) (a12 a02 )


0

2 02
02

Hence

02 12

Prof. Okey Ugweje

max likelihood ratio test

Bayes Decision Criterion - 7

Department of Communications Engineering

H 0 : p ( z | s0 )

p ( z | s1 )
1
p ( z | s0 )

In terms of the Bayes criterion, it implies that the cost of


both types of error is the same
This type of decision rule is called the maximum a
posteriori (MAP) criterion (or minimum error
criterion)

The last equation corresponds to making a decision


based on the comparison of received signal to some
threshold level

Prof. Okey Ugweje

p ( z | s1 ) P[ s0 ]
likelihood ratio test (LRT)
p ( z | s0 ) P[ s1 ]

where z is minimum error criterion and 0 is optimum threshold


367

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

368

Bayes Decision Criterion - 8

Probability of Error - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

For antipodal signal, s1(t) = - s0(t) a1 = - a0

Error will occur if


s1 is sent s0 is received

z 0

ao

P[H0|s1] = P[e|s1]

a1

P[e | s1 ] 0 p ( z | s1 ) dz

This means that if received signal was positive, s1(t)


was sent, else s0(t) is sent

s0 is sent s1 is received

ao

a1

P[H1|s0] = P[e|s0]

P[e | s0 ] p ( z | s0 )dz
0

See pp. 121~122 & section


B.2

The total probability of error is the sum of the errors


2

PB P (e, si ) P[e | s1 ]P[ s1 ] P[e | s0 ]P[ s0 ]


i 1

P[ H 0 | s1 ]P[ s1 ] P[ H1 | s0 ]P[ s0 ]
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

369

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Probability of Error - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

1 z a 2
0
exp
PB
dz
0
2

0
0
( z a0 )
u
, 0 du dz

If signals are equally probable

P[ H 0 | s1 ] P[ H1 | s0 ]

by symmetry
PB 12 P[ H 0 | s1 ] P[ H1 | s0 ] P[ H1 | s0 ]

( a a ) / 2

Hence, PB, is probability that an incorrect hypothesis is


made
Think of PB as the area under the tail of either of the
conditional distributions, p(z|s1) or p(z|s2), i.e.,


Prof. Okey Ugweje

a a
PB Q 1 0
2 0

1 z a 2
0
exp
dz
2

2
0
Federal University of Technology, Minna

1
2
exp u du A *
2
2

This equation cannot be evaluated in closed form


This is the famous Q-function or complementary error
function
Hence,

PB p ( H1 | s0 )dz p ( z | s0 )dz

PB P[ H 0 | s1 ]P[ s1 ] P[ H1 | s0 ]P[ s0 ]
1
2

370

Probability of Error - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Federal University of Technology, Minna

371

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

372

Probability of Error - 4
Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Pe is minimized by choosing h(t) or H(f) such that optimum


threshold 0 is minimized
That is
a (t ) a1 (t )
[a (T ) a1 (T )]2
or 02 0
0 0
2

A note on the Q(x) - complementary (co) error function


Equivalent Definitions

Correlator

1
x
e rfc

2
2
e rfc x 2Q x 2
Q( x)

For large arguments (x large), Q function


Q( x)

1
2
exp x
x 2
2

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

373

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Correlator-Type Receiver - 1

Federal University of Technology, Minna

374

Correlator-Type Receiver - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

The correlator cross-correlates r(t), with the 2


possible transmitted symbols s0(t) and s1(t)

The detector compares z1 and z0 and decides that


1 was transmitted if z1 > z0
0 was transmitted if z1 < z0
So when s1(t) is transmitted,
PB = P[z0 > z1] = P[n0 > E + n1] = P[n0 -n1> E]
Let x = n0 - n1

z ()dt
T

r (t )

z0 (t )

tT

z0 ( T )

Threshold
Detector

s0 ( t )

z ()dt
T

z1(t )

si ( t )

z1 ( T )

s1 ( t )

Output for either z0 or z1 is given by


z0 (T ) 0 r (t ) s0 (t )dt
T

E x 0 zero mean

z1 (T ) 0 r (t ) s1 (t ) dt
T

This cross-correlation process basically computes the


projection of r(t) into 2 basis functions s0(t) and s1(t)
The outputs z0 and z1 are then feed to the Threshold Detector
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

375

0, orthogonal

E x E n0 n1 E n E n 2 E n0 n1
N N
Noise Variance
2 E n 2 (t ) 2 0 0 n2
4 2
2

Prof. Okey Ugweje

2
0

2
1

Federal University of Technology, Minna

376

Correlator-Type Receiver - 3

Correlator-Type Receiver - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Hence PB is

Other Forms of the Correlator

x
1

exp 2 dx
P

E
B 2
2 x
x
2

Form 1:
x

x2
1
exp
dx
E
2
2
E
Q

N0

z ()dt
T

s0 ( t )

r (t )

z0 (t )

z ()dt
T

z(T )

si ( t )

tT

z1 (t )

s1 ( t )

A similar procedure can be used to derive the PB

Form 2:

r (t )

z () dt

si (t )

s1(t ) s0 (t )

t T

observe the correlating signal given by s1(t)-s0(t)


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

377

Correlator-Type Receiver - 5

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

378

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Suppose there are many signals si(t), i = 0, 2, , M-1,


the received signal can be correlated using a bank of
correlators
x

z ()dt
T

tT

z0 ( T )

s0 ( t )
r (t )

z ()dt
T

s1 ( t )

z1 ( T )

z ()dt
T

Selects
si(t) with
the
max zi(t)

Matched Filter

si ( t )

z (T )
M 1

s (t )
M 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

379

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

380

Matched Filter Receivers - 1

Matched Filter Receivers - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

A matched filter is a linear filter that optimizes the


SNR for a symbol
i.e., maximizes the SNR at the output for a given
transmitted symbol waveform
Given r(t) = s(t) + n(t) at the input, we want to find the
filter characteristics h(t) or H(f) that maximizes the
output SNR

A filter that is matched to the waveform s(t), has an


impulse response
h(t) = s(Tb-t), 0 t Tb

s(t )

r (t )

h(t ) s(Tb t )

z(T )

z(t )

Notice that h(t) is a delayed version of the mirror


image (rotated on the t = 0 axis) of the original signal
waveform
E.g.,
s(t )

si (t )

t T

n(t )

Tb

signal

Prof. Okey Ugweje

h(t ) s(Tb t )

s(t )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

381

Matched Filter Receivers - 3

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Tb

image

Tb

signal delayed by Tb

Federal University of Technology, Minna

382

Matched Filter Receivers - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

This is a causal system


a system is causal if before an excitation is applied
at time t = T, the response is zero for - < t < T
Signal waveform at the output of the matched filter is
z (t ) 0 r ( )h(t )d

convolution

0 r ( ) s (Tb t )d
t

If we sample z(t) at t = Tb, we obtain

z (Tb ) z (t ) t T 0 b r ( ) s ( )d
T

Important Property of Matched Filter:


If s(t) is corrupted by an AWGN, the filter with impulse
response h(t) maximizes the SNR
To prove this let
r(t) = si(t) + n(t), t0 t t0+Tb , i= 0,1
S(f) = Fourier Transform of s(t)
H(f) = Transfer function of the filter h(t)
For MF, we want to determine h(t) or H(f) that
maximizes output SNR

Hence the sampled output of the filter at time t = T is


exactly the same as the output of the correlator
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

383

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

384

Matched Filter Receivers - 5

Matched Filter Receivers - 6

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

But

Time Domain Analysis:


h(t)

r(t)

2
E yn2 (T ) E 0T n( )h(T )d

y(t)

y (t ) 0 r ( )h(t )d
t

E yn2 (T ) 0 0 E n( )n(t ) h(T )h(T t )dtd


N T T
0 0 0 t h(T )h(T t )dtd
2
N0 T 2

h (T t )dt
2 0
T T

0 s ( )h(t )d 0 n( )h(t )d
t

sample at t T
0 s ( )h(T )d 0 n( )h(T )d
ys (T ) yn (T )
T

2
S ys (T )

N T E yn2 (T )

Prof. Okey Ugweje

noise variance

Federal University of Technology, Minna

385

Matched Filter Receivers - 7

Federal University of Technology, Minna

386

Matched Filter Receivers - 8

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

The noise variance depends on the PSD of the


noise and the energy in the impulse response, h(t)
2

T
T
S 0 s ( )h(T )d 0 h( ) s (T )d

N0 T 2
N0 T 2
N T
0 h (T t )dt
h (T t )dt
2
2 0

Hence by replacing x(t) = h(t), y(t) = s(T-t)


2
2
S 0 h ( )d 0 s (T )d

N T 2
0
N T
0 h (T t )dt
T

From Cauchy-Schwarz inequality, we know that


2


x(t ) y (t )dt x(t ) dt y (t ) dt

with equality when x(t) = ky(t), k = constant


Federal University of Technology, Minna

We can maximize this expression by holding the


denominator constant and then optimizing the numerator

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

387

It is clear here that SNR is maximum when h(t) =


ks(T-t)
2 2
2
2 T 2
0 k s (T t )dt 0 s (T )d
S

s (t )dt

N0 T 2 2
N0 0
N T

k
s
(
T
t
)
dt

2 0
2E

N0

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

388

Matched Filter Receivers - 9

Matched Filter Receivers - 10

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Substituting

Frequency Domain Analysis:

The numerator is of the form

H ( f )Y ( f )df

S a (t )

N T E n 2 (t )
E n (t ) Rn (0) Gny ( f ) df
N0
2

Gny ( f ) H ( f ) Gnx ( f )

H ( f ) df

Prof. Okey Ugweje

H ( f )Y ( f )df

H ( f ) Gnx ( f )df

If written with Cauchy-Schwartz inequality we have

eqn. 1.53

389

Prof. Okey Ugweje

max at 0

Federal University of Technology, Minna

390

Matched Filter Receivers - 12


Hence

j 2 ft
df
S 2 H ( f ) S ( f )e

2

N T N 0
H ( f ) df

When the signal is matched, it means that the transfer


function achieves the equality condition, i.e.,
2E
S
max
0 max
N T N 0

Parsavals theorem

This also means that the optimum choice of H(f) is

S ( f ) df s 2 (t ) dt E Energy of the signal


Federal University of Technology, Minna

S 2 S ( f ) 2 df 2 E


N0
N T N 0

This is the maximum SNR


It depends on signal energy E and noise PSD
Does not depend on signal waveform

2 H ( f ) df S ( f ) df

N0
H ( f ) df
2
2

S ( f ) df
N0

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Department of Communications Engineering

Hence

Equality holds iff H(f) = KY*(f)

Matched Filter Receivers - 11

H ( f ) df Y ( f ) df
H ( f ) df S ( f ) df

Department of Communications Engineering

eqn. 1.42

Federal University of Technology, Minna

But

where Y(f) = S(f)ej2ft

but the denominator is the noise variance


2

ai (t ) FT 1 H ( f ) Si ( f ) H ( f ) Si ( f )e j 2 ft df

Therefore

j 2 ft

dt
S H ( f ) S ( f )e

N
2
0
N T
H ( f ) df

Since z(t) = a(t) + n0(t), where a(t) is the signal


component, we can write

H 0 ( f ) H ( f ) kS ( f )e j 2 fT

391

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

392

Matched Filter Receivers - 13

Matched Filter Receivers - 14

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

This implies that

Similarly, bank of Matched filters is used to receive


several signals

h(t ) F 1 H ( f ) kS ( f )e j 2 fT e j 2 ft df

kS ( f ) e j 2 f (T t ) df

h(t ) s0 (Tb t )

z0 (t )

z0 ( T )

kS ( f )e j 2 f (T t ) df

h(t ) s1(Tb t )

z1(t )

z1 ( T )

r (t )

ks T t ks T t

M 1

tT

The impulse response of the M matched filters are


given by

hk (t ) ksk (Tb t ), o t T

h(t ) ks T t

Prof. Okey Ugweje

si ( t )

z (T )

M 1

M 1

ks T t ks T t
Thus

h(t ) s (Tb t ) z (t )

If the signal is real, then

Selects
si(t)
with
the
max zi(t)

where sk(t) are the set of basis function

Federal University of Technology, Minna

393

Summary of Matched Filters

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

394

Correlator vs. Matched Filter - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

A Matched filter is a detection filter that optimizes the


output SNR

The functions of the correlator and matched filter


are the same

s(t )

r (t )

h(t ) s(Tb t )

r (t )

si (t )

h(t ) s0 (Tb t )

z0 (t )

z0 ( T )

h(t ) s1(Tb t )

z1(t )

z1 ( T )

h(t ) s (Tb t ) z (t )
M 1

M 1

z () dt
T

t T

n(t )

r (t )

z(T )

z(t )

Selects
si(t)
with
the
max zi(t)

r (t )

t T

h(t ) s(Tb t )

n(t )
si ( t )

si (t )

(a)

s(t )
s(t )

z(t )

z(T )

z(t )

si (t )

t T

(b)

Comparing (a) and (b) have


From (a)
T

z (T )

z (t ) 0 r (t ) s (t )dt

M 1

tT

z (t ) t T z (T ) 0 s ( )r ( )d
T

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

395

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

396

Correlator vs. Matched Filter - 2

Examples

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

From (b):
z' (t) r(t)h(t)

But

Example Signal to Noise Ratio

r( )h(t )d 0 r( )h(t )d
t

h(t) s(T t) h(t ) s[T (t )] s(T t)


z' (t)

Example Correlator Output

z r( )s( T t)d
t

At sampling instant t = T, we have

Example Matched Filter

z ' (t ) t T z ' (T ) 0T r ( )s( T T )d


0T r ( )s( )d
This is the same result obtained in (a)
Hence

z(T ) z' (T )

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

397

#Generalized One Dimensional Signals - 1

-A

Binary Baseband Orthogonal Signals


Binary Antipodal Signals

2
2
Eavg A A A2
2

s1
0

398

Department of Communications Engineering

One Dimensional Signal Constellation


so

Federal University of Technology, Minna

#Generalized One Dimensional Signals - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

M=2

Prof. Okey Ugweje

+A

so

s1
0

-A

2
2
Eavg A A A2
2

+A

Binary Orthogonal Signals

M=4

so

s1

-3A

-A

s2

s3

+A

+3A

2
+A s1

s0

Eavg 9 A A A 9 A 5 A2
4
M=8

Eavg
Prof. Okey Ugweje

so

s1

s2

s3

-7A

-5A

-3A

-A

+A

2
2
Eavg A A A2
2

2-Dimensional Signal Constellation

s4

s5

s6

s7

+A

+3A

+5A

+7A

An example:

2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
49 A 25 A 9 A A A 9 A 25 A 49 A 21A2
8
Federal University of Technology, Minna

1 (t )

2 (t )

1
T

1
T
T
2

399

Prof. Okey Ugweje

T
2

zoT 1(t) 2(t)dt 0

1
T

Federal University of Technology, Minna

400

#Generalized One Dimensional Signals - 3

#Generalized One Dimensional Signals - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Generalization to M-ary Orthogonal Signals

M=4

M=8

TimeDomain
s0 (t ) A1(t )
s1(t ) A 2 (t )
s2 (t ) A 3(t )
s3(t ) A 4 (t )
TimeDomain
s0 (t ) A1(t )
s1(t ) A 2 (t )
s2 (t ) A 3(t )
s3(t ) A 4 (t )
s4 (t ) A 5(t )
s5(t ) A 6 (t )
s6 (t ) A 7(t )
s7(t ) A 8(t )

Signal Space
s0 ( A, 0, 0, 0)
s1 (0, A, 0, 0)
s2 (0, 0, A, 0)
s3 (0, 0, 0, A)

where {1(t), 2(t), 3(t) 4(t)}


are a set of orthonormal basis
functions

Signal Space
s0 ( A, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0)
s1 (0, A, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0)
s2 (0, 0, A, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0)
s3 (0, 0, 0, A, 0, 0, 0, 0)
s4 (0, 0, 0, 0, A, 0, 0, 0)
s5 (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, A, 0, 0)
s6 (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, A, 0)
s7 (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, A)

Prof. Okey Ugweje

where {1(t), 2(t), 3(t)


4(t), 5(t), 6(t), 7(t)
8(t)} are a set of
orthonormal basis
functions

Federal University of Technology, Minna

General M
(M is a power of 2)

401

Most Common Signal Constellations - 1

s2 (t ) A3 (t )

s2 (0, 0, A, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0)

s3 (t ) A4 (t )

s3 (0, 0, 0, A, 0, 0, 0, 0)

sM 1 (t ) A M (t )

sM 1 (0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, , A)

Federal University of Technology, Minna

402

Most Common Signal Constellations - 2


On-Off Keying
Are one dimensional signals either ON or OFF
with signaling points falling on the real line
so

Three common types of binary signals:


Antipodal

Two signals are said to be antipodal if one signal is the


negative of the other s1(t) = - s0(t)
Signal have equal energy with signal point on the real line

Prof. Okey Ugweje

s1 (0, A, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0)

Prof. Okey Ugweje

That is, a geometric representation of signals

s1
0

s1 (t ) A2 (t )

Department of Communications Engineering

Constellation is a method of representing the symbol


states of modulated bandpass signals in terms of their
amplitude and phase

Signal Space
s0 ( A, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0, 0)

where {1(t), 2(t), 3(t) M-1(t)} are a set of orthonormal basis functions

Department of Communications Engineering

so

Time Domain
s0 (t ) A1 (t )

Eavg E E E
2

Federal University of Technology, Minna

403

s1
0

Eavg 0 E E
2
2

With OOK, there are just 2 symbol states to map


onto the constellation space
a(t) = 0 (no carrier amplitude, giving a point at
the origin)
a(t) = A cosct (giving a point on the positive
horizontal axis at a distance A from the origin)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

404

Most Common Signal Constellations - 3


Department of Communications Engineering

Orthogonal

Maximum Likelihood Receiver

Requires a 2 dimensional geometric


representation since there are 2 linearly
independent functions s1(t) and s0(t)

(derivation will be given in class)

E so
s1
0

Digital Communication System


Department of Communications Engineering

Eavg E E E
2

Typically, the horizontal axis is taken as a


reference for symbols that are In-phase with the
carrier cosct, and the vertical axis represents
the Quadrature carrier component, sinct
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

405

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

406

Probability of Error for Binary Signals - 1

Digital Communication System


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Unipolar Baseband Signaling


s1 (t ) A, 0 t T , for binary 1

1 0 0 1 1
T

s0 (t ) 0, 0 t T , for binary 0
r (t )

z () dt
T

z(t )

t T

z(T )

z(T ) o

3T

5T

si (t )

s1(t ) s0 (t )

Probability of Error

r(t) = s(t) + n(t)

For s1(t):

a1 (T ) E z (T ) | s1 (t ) E 0 r ( ) s1 ( )d 0 r ( ) s0 ( )d
T

E 0 s1 ( ) n s1 ( )d 0 s1 ( ) n s0 ( )d
T

T
E 0 s12 ( ) d 0 0 0

A2T
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

407

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

408

Probability of Error for Binary Signals - 2

Probability of Error for Binary Signals - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

For s0(t):

Also:

a0 (T ) E z (T ) | s0 (t )

Ed 0 s1 (t ) s0 (t ) dt A2T

E 0 r ( ) s1 ( )d 0 r ( ) s0 ( )d
T

A2T

P Q 0 Q

B
N0
2 N0

E 0 s0 ( ) n s1 ( )d 0 s0 ( ) n s0 ( )d
T

T
T
E 0 s0 ( ) s1 ( ) d 0 0 s02 ( ) d 0
0

Ed
P Q

B
2 N0

a1 a0 A T

2
2
2

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

409

Probability of Error for Binary Signals - 4


0 t T , for binary 1

z ()dt
T

s0 ( t )
x

-A

3T

5T

FG E IJ
H NK

Pb Q

z(T )

tT

z1 (t )

z(T ) o

Prof. Okey Ugweje

IJ FG
K H

FG
H

Pb Q

Ed

10

si ( t )

T
0

Bipolar signals require a


factor of 2 increase in
energy compared to
Unipolar
Since 10log102 = 3 dB, we
say that bipolar signaling
offers a 3 dB better
performance than Unipolar

A A dt 2 A T

z (t ) z1 (t ) z0 (t ) a1 a0 0 0 0
Ed
Q
2 No

Bipolar (antipodal)

s1 ( t )

F
P QG
H

410

2 Eb
No

IJ
K

z0 (t )

z ()dt

Unipolar (orthogonal)

1 0 0 1 1
T

s0 (t ) A, 0 t T , for binary 0

r (t )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Department of Communications Engineering

Bipolar Signaling (antipodal)

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Probability of Error for Binary Signals - 5

Department of Communications Engineering

s1 (t ) A,

Eb
P Q

B
N0

IJ FG
K H

4 A2T Q
2 No

2 Eb
No

IJ
K

Federal University of Technology, Minna

411

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Othogonal
Antipodal
10

FG E IJ
H NK

-2

Q
P robability of Bit Error

10

10

10

10

-4

-6

FG
H

-8

2 Eb
No

IJ
K

3-dB

-10

Federal University of Technology, Minna

10
12
Eb/No (dB)

14

16

18

20

412

Examples

Probability of Error for Binary Signals - 6


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Comparing BER Performance

Example
Probability of Error

10

Othogonal
Antipodal

7.810

For Eb/No = 10 dB

Pb,orthogonal = 9.2x10-2

Pb, antipodal = 7.8x10-4

-2

10

Probability of Bit Error

9.2 10

-4

10

Example
Probability of Error

-6

10

-8

10

-10

10

10
12
Eb/No (dB)

14

16

18

20

For the same received signal to noise ratio, antipodal


provides lower bit error rate than orthogonal
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

413

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

414

Baseband Communication Systems

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

A baseband signal x(t) with bandwidth B is a signal for


which X(f) is non-zero for |f| B and for which X(f) = 0 for
|f| > B (PSD concentrated near DC)
X(f)
-B

Digital Baseband
Communication System

A baseband communication system transmits


information using a baseband signal
Analog Input

A/D
Converter

an

Line
Coder

s(t )

Channel

To Receiver

Transmiter

Here the transmitter is simply a line coder (w/pulse


shaping function) that maps the sequence of bits an onto a
line code signal s(t)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

415

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

416

Problems with Baseband Communication - 1

Problems with Baseband Communication - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Most channels require that the baseband signal be


shifted to a higher frequency
Since antenna size is inversely proportional to the
center frequency fc, this is difficult to realize

Most channels are shared by several transmitters at


the same time
Shifting each user to different freq the channel can
be divided into freq slots
Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA)
Thus we must look at the process of shifting a
baseband signal to higher frequency
This process is called Carrier Wave Modulation

Problems:
Higher frequencies allow for the use of smaller antennas size versus

For speech signal f = 3 kHz = 105


Antenna size w/o modulation = 105 m = 60 miles practically unrealizable
This is evident that efficient antenna of realistic physical
size is needed for radio communication system
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

417

Problems with Baseband Communication - 3

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

418

Problems with Baseband Communication - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Solution is to use Bandpass Communication Systems

In a bandpass digital communication system, the


bit stream an is first converted to a baseband line code
m(t) by a line coder and is then converted to a
bandpass signal s(t) by a modulator

A bandpass signal has non-negligible spectrum only about


some carrier frequency fc >> 0
i.e., x(t) with bandwidth B is a signal for which X(f) is nonzero at some region about fc and for which X(f) = 0
elsewhere
X(f)
B

Analog
Input

-fc

fc

Federal University of Technology, Minna

an

Line
Coder

m(t )

Modulator

s(t )

Channel
To
Receiver

Transmiter

Note: the bandwidth of a bandpass signal is the range of


positive frequencies for which the spectrum is non-zero
Usually, the bandwidth of bandpass signal is twice the
bandwidth of the baseband signal used to create it
Effective transmission of baseband information signal
usually requires the use of a bandpass signal
Prof. Okey Ugweje

A/D
Converter

419

Baseband signals m(t) may be transformed into


bandpass signals s(t) through the process of
modulation

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

420

Problems with Baseband Communication - 5

Representation of Bandpass Signals

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

We need some additional analytical tools to handle


bandpass signals

1. Magnitude and Phase (M & P)


Any bandpass signal can be represented as:
s (t ) R (t ) cos c t (t )

3 Major ways of Representing Bandpass Signals

R(t) 0 is real valued signal representing the magnitude


(t) is a real valued signal representing the phase

Magnitude and Phase (M&P) Representation


In-phase and Quadrature (I&Q) Representation
Complex Envelope Representation

This representation is easy to interpret physically, but


often is not mathematically convenient
In this form, modulated signal can represent information
through changing three parameters of the signal namely:
Amplitude R(t): as in Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK)
Phase
(t): as in Phase Shift Keying (PSK)
Frequency d(t)/dt: Frequency Shift Keying (FSK)

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

421

Representation of Bandpass Signals

Federal University of Technology, Minna

422

Representation of Bandpass Signals

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

2. In-phase and Quadrature (I & Q) Representation


Any bandpass signal can also be represented as

Relationship Between M & P and I & Q Forms:


To transform from M&P to I&Q
x(t) = R(t)cos(t), y(t) = R(t)sin(t)
To transform from I&Q to M&P

s (t ) x(t ) cos( ct ) y (t )sin( ct )


x(t) is a real-valued signal called In-phase (I)
y(t) is a real-valued signal called Quadrature (Q)
This is often a convenient form which
Emphasizes the fact that two signals may be
transmitted within the same bandwidth
Closely parallels the physical implementation of
the Tx/Rx
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

R (t ) x 2 (t ) y 2 (t )

(t) tan 1

LM y(t)OP
N x(t)Q

I and Q portions of the signal are orthogonal


Look
at the correlation between I & Q portions
T
x(t ) cos ct y (t )sin ctdt

1T
x(t ) y (t ) sin ct ct sin ct ct dt
20
1T
x(t ) y (t ) sin 0 sin 2 ct dt 0
20
423

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

424

Representation of Bandpass Signals

Representation of Bandpass Signals

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

3. Complex Envelope (CE) Representation

Relationship: CE and I & Q Forms

Any bandpass signal can also be represented as

To transform from CE to I&Q:

s (t ) Re g (t ) exp( j c t )
where g(t) = complex envelope - complex-valued signal
S(t) is convenient in many instances for analysis. Why?
Compact
Easy to manipulate without recourse to trig. identities

x(t) = Re[g(t)], y(t) = Im[g(t)]


s(t) = Re[g(t)ejt] = Re[(x(t)+jy(t)).(cosct+jsinct)]
= x(t)cosct - y(t)sinct

Relationship between Spectral Representations


Assume that
j t
s (t ) Re g (t )e c

Relationship: Complex Envelope and M&P Forms


To transform from CE to M&P:
R(t) = |g(t)|, (t) = g(t)
To transform from M&P to CE:

Fourier Transform (Deterministic Signals):


S( f ) 1 G( f fc ) G( f fc )
2

g(t) = R(t)ej(t)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

425

Representation of Bandpass Signals


Department of Communications Engineering

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

426

Bandpass Modulation & Demodulation - 1


Department of Communications Engineering

Power Spectral Density (Random Signals):

Gs ( f ) 1 Gg ( f fc ) Gg ( f fc )
4
Relationship: Power and Envelope of Bandpass
Power of bandpass signal is one half of power in
complex envelope:

Source
bits

lm q
i

Pe

Performance
Measure

Gs Rs (0)

Source
Encoder

Format

Channel
Encoder

Modulate

Spread

Multiple
Access

Bits or
Symbol

Waveforms

Digital
output

lm q

1
1
1
2
g (t ) Rg (0) Gg
2
2
2

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Multiplex

Digital
input

Format

Source
Decoder

Channel
Decoder

Source
bits

Prof. Okey Ugweje

From other
sources
Channel
bits

427

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Demultiplex

Demodulate
&
Detect

Despread

Multiple
Access

Channel
bits
To other
destinations

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Carrier and symbol


synchronization

428

Aspects of Conversion

Bandpass Modulation & Demodulation - 1


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Transmitter
Message
source

m(t )

Signal
transmission
encoder

si

Receiver
Modulator

si (t )

Channel

x(t )

Decoder

Signal
transmission
decoder

Carrier Wave

r = bits/signal = log2( L )
L = number of levels (signal elements)
N = bps
S = signals/sec (baud)
c = 1 for broadband (WAN digital-to-analog)
c = for baseband (LAN digital-to-digital)

Bandpass Modulation shifts the spectrum of a baseband


signal so that it becomes a bandpass signal
Why Modulate? (a review)
signals propagate well through the atmosphere
allows many signals w/different carrier freqs to share the
spectrum
is used to place signals at desired freq band for signal
processing
Info signal must conform to limitation of its channel
is used to map digital data sequence into waveform
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

cN
r

429

Digital Modulation

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

430

Digital Modulation Schemes

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Basic Digital Modulation Schemes:


Amplitude Shift Keying (ASK) not commonly used
Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) very useful
Phase Shift Keying (PSK) very useful

For Binary signals (M = 2), we obtain BASK, BPSK,


BFSK, BAPK
For M > 2, many variations of the above techniques
exit usually classified as M-ary Modulation/detection,
e.g., MPSK

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

431

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

432

Most Common Digital Nodulation

MOdulation and DEModulation - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

MODEM

(Phase info
required)

COHERENT

BINARY

ASK
(OOK)

M-ary

ASK

NONCOHERENT

HYBRID

APK(QAM)

BINARY

M-ary

ASK
(OOK)

ASK

FSK
FSK
(MSK)

FSK
PSK
(QPSK,
OQPSK)

PSK

DPSK

(No Phase info


required)

HYBRID

FSK
DPSK
CPM

CPM

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

433

MOdulation and DEModulation - 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

434

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Analysis or Method of Approach:


Modulation Process
Mathematical Signal Representation

Power Spectral Density of the modulated signal


Bandwidth of the System

Detection Processes
Performance of the system

Amplitude Shift Keying

Error Probability

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

435

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

436

Amplitude Shift Keying - 2

Amplitude Shift Keying - 1


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

In amplitude shift keying, the amplitude of the carrier


signal is varied to create signal elements.
Both frequency and phase remain constant while the
amplitude changes.

Modulation Process
Also called ON-OFF Keying (OOK))
In ASK, amplitude of carrier is switched between 2 (or more)
levels according to the digital data
1s & 0s are represented by two amplitude levels A1 & A0
Product modulator or
ON-OFF switch

m(t )
0

s(t )

3T

A cos( ot )
Baseband Data

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

437

Prof. Okey Ugweje

OOK Modulator

Modulated bandpass Signal

Federal University of Technology, Minna

438

Amplitude Shift Keying - 4

Amplitude Shift Keying - 3


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Implementation of binary ASK

Analytical Expression:
Ai cos(0t ), 0 t T binary 1
s (t )
0,

0 t T binary 0

where Ai = peak amplitude


2
s (t ) A cos(0t ) 2 Arms cos(0t ) 2 Arms
cos(0t )

V2
2 P cos( t ) P
R
0

2E
T

Hence,

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

439

Prof. Okey Ugweje

cos( t )
0

2 E cos( t ),
0
s (t ) T
0,

0t T , binary 1
0t T , binary 0

Federal University of Technology, Minna

440

Amplitude Shift Keying - 5

Amplitude Shift Keying - 6

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Generally, we can write


si (t )

2 E (t )
i cos( t ),
0
T

0 t T,

Power Spectral Density (PSD)


From the given signal

i 0,1, 2,..., M 1

s (t ) Ac m(t ) cos c t

where
T
Ei 0 si2 (t )dt , i 0,1, 2, ..., M 1

The PSD can be found using


Gs ( f )

We may also write


s1 (t ) Ac m(t ) cos(0t ), 0 t T binary 1

s0 (t ) 0,

To evaluate this we must first find the PSD of the


complex envelope m(t)
Using the fact that m(t) is a unipolar NRZ line code
given by

0 t T binary 0

This can be used to derive the transmitter for ASK:


Xn

line coder

A2
GM ( f f c ) GM ( f f c )
2

2,
an
0,

m(t )

m(t ) an f (t nT ),

Ac

cos( ct)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

441

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Amplitude Shift Keying - 7

442

Department of Communications Engineering

With A Ac 2 and using the general expression for


PSD of a unipolar line code, we obtain
Gg

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Amplitude Shift Keying - 8

Department of Communications Engineering

A 2
(f) c

for binary 1
for binary 0

impulse

4T
T
A2
1
c TSa ( fT ) 1 ( f )
2T
T

F ( f ) 2 1 ( fc )
2

A
c ( f ) TSa 2 ( fT )

2
Tb

Note:

Federal University of Technology, Minna

fc 2 Rb

It can be seen that the bandwidth B of ASK modulated


signal is twice that occupied by the source baseband
stream

The spectrum of a digitally modulated signal depends


on the baseband data format used to represent the
digital data
Prof. Okey Ugweje

fc Rb

443

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

444

Amplitude Shift Keying - 9

Receivers - Demodulators & Detectors


Coherent Receiver - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Bandwidth of ASK
Bandwidth B, of ASK can be found from its power spectral
density
B is twice that of unipolar NRZ line code used to create it, i.e.,
B 2 Rb 2
Tb
This is the null-to-null bandwidth of ASK
If raised cosine rolloff pulse shaping is used, then

1) Low Pass Filter Receiver


t T
r (t )

LPF

z(T )

si (t )

cos(t )

Coherent detection requires the phase information


A coherent detector mixes the incoming signal with a
locally generated carrier reference
Multiplying r(t) by the receiver LO (say cos(ct)) yields a
signal with a baseband component plus a component at
2fc

B (1 r)Rb W 1 (1 r)Rb
2

Spectral efficiency of ASK is half that of a baseband unipolar


NRZ line code
This is because the quadrature component is wasted
95% energy bandwidth B 3 3Rb
Tb

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

445

Receivers - Demodulators & Detectors

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

446

Receivers - Demodulators & Detectors

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Coherent Receiver - 2

Coherent Receiver - 3
2) Matched Filter Receiver

Passing this signal through a low pass filter


eliminates the high frequency component
An integrator can be used in place of the LPF
The output of the LPF is sampled once per bit
period
This sample z(T) is applied to a decision rule
z(T) is called the decision statistic

r (t )

h(t ) s(Tb t )

z(T )

z(t )

si (t )

t T

MF receivers are very common approach in


signal detection in most bandpass data
modems
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

447

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

448

Receivers - Demodulators & Detectors

Receivers - Demodulators & Detectors


Non-Coherent Receiver - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Coherent Receiver - 3
3) Correlator Receiver
r (t )

z(t )

() dt

Does not require a phase reference info at the receiver


If we do not know the phase and frequency of the carrier,
we can use a non-coherent technique to recover signal
1) Envelope Detector:

t T

si (t )

z(T )

s1(t ) s0 (t )

r (t )

4) Quasi-coherent Square-law Receiver


r (t )

( )2

Prof. Okey Ugweje

z () dt
T

z(t )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

449

t T

z(t )

z(T )

si (t )

If quadrature versions of the modulated carrier signal are


available then we may use the following receiver
I

Noncoherent reception of OOK is popular in fiber optics


Prof. Okey Ugweje

si (t )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

450

Department of Communications Engineering

2) Square-law Detector:
T (n 1/ 2)
T (n 1/ 2) ()dt

z(T )

Probability of Error (Bit Error Rate)

Receivers - Demodulators & Detectors


Non-Coherent Receiver - 2
( )2

LPF

t T

The simplest implementation


of an envelope detector
comprises a diode rectifier
and smoothing filter

si (t )

z(T )

Department of Communications Engineering

r (t )

Rectifier

z(t )

Envelope Detector

t T

BPF
@ fo

BASK effectively uses unipolar signal source and the


performance depends on whether coherent or noncoherent detection is used
Error analysis is similar for both cases
For both cases,

r (t ) s (t ) n(t )

s(t) is exactly the same as in both cases


For coherent detection n(t) is Gaussian, however for
noncoherent detection n(t) is no longer Gaussian due to
the squaring operation
Because of this squaring, the optimal threshold is not
necessarily halfway between the 2 possible values of s(t)

Derivation given in class


451

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

452

Example 39: ASK

Probability of Error (Bit Error Rate) - ASK


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Derivation

A binary ASK communication system employs


rectangular pulses of duration Tb and amplitude A to
transmit digital information at a rate R = 105 bps. If the
PSD of the AWGN is N0/2, where N0 = 10-2 W/Hz,
determine the value of A that is required to achieve the
probability of error of PB = 10-6

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

453

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

454

Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) - 1


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

In frequency shift keying (FSK), the frequency of the


carrier signal is varied to represent data.
The frequency of the modulated signal is constant for
the duration of one signal element, but changes for the
next signal element if the data element changes.
Both peak amplitude and phase remain constant for all
signal elements.

Frequency Shift Keying

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

455

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

456

Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) - 2

Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Modulation Process:
The instantaneous carrier freq is switched b/w 2 or
more levels according to the baseband digital data
data bits select a carrier at one or more freqs
the data is encoded in the freq
FSK conveys the data using distinct carrier freqs to
represent symbol states
Important property = amplitude of the modulated
wave is constant

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

457

Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) - 4

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

458

Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) - 5

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Analytical Expression

Generally, MFSK may be used to transmit k = log2M bps


waveforms
f determines the degree to which we can discriminate among
M possible signals
As a measure of similarity (or dissimilarity) between a pair of
signal waveforms, a correlation coefficient ij, is used

s (t )
i

2E
cos
T

i t ,

i 0,1, , M 1

t
i (t ) 0t d
m( )d )

fi

d
i (t ) f 0 f d m(t )
dt

Can also be expressed as


si (t )

where

Analog form

E1 oT si (t ) s j (t )dt
ij

freq offset

2E
cos 2 f 0t 2 ift , i 0,1, , M 1
T

f fi fi 1 ,

fi f o if
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

459

s
1 T 2 Es
cos 2 f ot 2 ift cos 2 f o t 2 j ft
E o T
s
1 T
1 T
cos 2 (i j )ft dt o cos 4 f o t 2 (i
T o
T

sin 2 (i j )fT
2 (i j )fT

Prof. Okey Ugweje

dt
j )ft dt

0 since fo >> 1/T

Federal University of Technology, Minna

460

Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) - 6

Binary FSK - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

ij

Department of Communications Engineering

2 different freqs, f1 and f2 = f1 + f are used to transmit


binary data

sin 2 (i j )fT
2 (i j )fT

ij

f1

so (t ) Ac cos( 1t 1)

0.715
Tb

1
2Tb

1
Tb

-0.217

3
2Tb

2
Tb

2E
cos(2 f 0t 0 ), 0 t T
T
2E
cos(2 f1t 1 ), 0 t T
s1 (t )
T
s0 (t )

ij, is orthogonal when f is a multiple of 1/2T


Minimum of ij, = - 0.217 @ f = 0.715/T

Federal University of Technology, Minna

461

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Binary FSK - 2

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Department of Communications Engineering

Binary Orthogonal Phase FSK

For NRZ Pulse Shape:

s1
so 0
0

1(t )

1 (t )

2E
cos( t 1 )
T

2 (t )

2E
cos( 2t 2 )
T


1 (t )2 (t )dt
ij

2E
cos(1 t 1 ) cos( 2t 2 )dt
T
sin 2Tb Tb 1 2 sin Tb 1 2
ij
2sin Tb

When 0 an 1 are chosen so that 1(t) and 2(t) are


orthogonal, i.e.,

1 (t )2 (t )

462

Binary FSK - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

2 (t )

s1(t ) Ac cos( 2t 2 )

Data is encoded in the freqs


That is, m(t) is used to select between 2 freqs
f1 is the mark freq, and f2 is the space freq

Note:

Prof. Okey Ugweje

f2

form a set of k = 2 basis orthonormal basis functions

sin 4fTb 2fTb 1 2 sin 2fTb 1 2


2sin 2Tb

We need to look at two cases


1.Continuous Phase: 1 = 2
2.Non-continuous Phase: 1 2

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

463

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

464

Binary FSK - 5

Binary FSK - 4
Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Requiring 2 oscillators adds to the system


complexity and cost
Because there are 2 different fc it is difficult to use
complex envelope notation
This makes analysis difficult
Discontinuities in phase of s(t) at switching instants
result in undesirable spectral characteristics
Corresponds to high sidelobe levels which could
cause adjacent channel interference
Discontinuous-phase FSK is not used much in
practice

Discontinuous Phase FSK


1

1 2

Phase Discontinuities

Phase discontinuities occur at symbol boundaries

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

465

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Binary FSK - 6

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Binary FSK - 7

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Continuous Phase FSK

Implementation of BFSK

466

0 1

No Phase Discontinuities

m(t)

BFSK

Frequency Modulator @ fo

1(t )

2
Tb

cos 2f1t

m(t)

ON-OFF Level
Encoder

+
x

Prof. Okey Ugweje

2 (t)

BFSK
2 cos 2f t
2
Tb

Federal University of Technology, Minna

467

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

468

Binary FSK - 8

Binary FSK - 9

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

A continuous-phase FSK (CPFSK) signal is


represented by:
si (t ) Ac cos c (t )

Peak Frequency Deviation


f

Df is the frequency deviation constant


m(t) is a digital line code
Usually polar, either with or without pulse shaping
CPFSK is an FM signal with digital line code modulating
signal
CPFSK is much more common than discontinuous phase
FSK
Unless otherwise specified, FSK will usually mean CPFSK
Federal University of Technology, Minna

Thus:

Ac cos( ot D f m( )d )

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Df

469

f1 f c f , f 2 f c f , f1 f 2 2f
Modulation Index
h

2f
2 fT
R

minimum value of h for which the 2 possible signals do not


interfere with one another is h = 0.5
CPFSK with h = 0.5 is called minimum shift keying (MSK)
GSM uses MSK with Gaussian pulse shapes (GMSK)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

470

Binary FSK - 11

Binary FSK - 10
Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Other FSK Modulation Methods


Vector or Quadrature

Representation of Continuous Phase FSK


Magnitude and Phase
R(t ) Ac

t
m( )d
(t ) D f

Complex Envelope Notation


See Fig. 4.24

FSK requires the generation of 2 symbols, one at a frequency


(c + 1) and one at a frequency (c 1)
To generate a freq. shift of 1 at modulator output , the I and
Q inputs need to be fed with cos1 and 1sin respectively
This approach is now frequently used to generate some of the
more elaborate filtered CPFSK formats in cellular handsets
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

471

Quadrature Notation

g(t ) Ac exp( jDf

t
m( )d )

x(t ) Ac cos( D f m( )d )
t

y (t ) Ac sin( D f m( )d )
t

Alternate Representation for CPFSK


Because frequency is the time rate of change of the
phase, we can represent a bandpass signal as
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

472

Binary FSK - 12

Binary FSK - 13

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

PSD of CPFSK
Because complex envelope g(t) is a nonlinear function of
m(t), an exact expression for the PSD is difficult to obtain
A good approximation for s(t) can be found by considering
FSK to be the sum of 2 OOK signals

d (t )
d (t )


s (t ) R (t ) cos c
t R (t ) cos 2 f c
t
dt
2 dt

Hence for CPFSK


d (t )
R(t ) Ac

and

dt

D f m(t )

1 m(t )
cos(2 ( f c f )t )
2
1 m(t )
Ac
cos(2 ( f c f )t )
2

s (t ) Ac

D m(t )

f
t A cos(2 f t )
s (t ) Ac cos 2 f c
c
i

2 dt

If m(t) is polar NRZ (and A = 1)


Df

, when m(t ) 1
f1 f c
2
fi
f f D f , when m(t ) 1
c
2
2
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

This approximation can be used to find the PSD


Result is that the null-to-null bandwidth is

B 2 f 1 r
473

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Binary FSK - 14

2Tb

Federal University of Technology, Minna

474

Binary FSK - 15

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Sunde's FSK

Clearly, the overall bandwidth occupied by the FSK


signal depends f
An FSK system using continuous phase transitions will
have much lower side-lobe energy than the
discontinuous case

Sunde's FSK arises when the spacing between the 2


symbol frequencies is made exactly equal to the symbol
rate
The spectrum uniquely contains 2 discrete spectral lines
at the two symbol frequencies in addition to a broad
spectral spread
These spectral lines may be used in coherent FSK
detector as the source of carrier references, often
extracted using a PLL

Minimum Shift Keying (MSK)


MSK employs symbol spacing of one half the
symbol rate
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

475

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

476

Binary FSK - 16

Binary FSK - 17

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

It produces a smooth spectrum with narrow main lobe


and reduced side-lobe energy
This narrow symbol spacing means that MSK is spectrally
efficient (more than BASK and BPSK, and about QPSK)
The price to be paid for this excellent performance is
more complexity in the generation and detection process
compared with Sunde's FSK

3
B r Rb

Detection of FSK:
Coherent
Coherent detection of FSK is similar to that for ASK but in this
case there are 2 detectors tuned to the 2 carrier frequencies
Recovery of fc in receiver
is made simple if the
frequency spacing
between symbols is made
equal to the symbol rate
(Sundes FSK)
Drawback of using Sunde's FSK
The bandwidth of the FSK signal is approximately 1.5 to 2
times that of an optimally filtered ASK or PSK binary signal

Bandwidth is minimized when h = 0.5 (i.e. for MSK)


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

477

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Binary FSK - 18
Department of Communications Engineering

The following configurations can be used for detecting FSK


signal

z () dt

z(t )

z ()dt

z0 (t )

t T

si (t )

z(T )

r (t )

tT

BPF/Envelope Detector:

z0 ( T )

Threshold
Detector

s0 ( t )
x

Noncoherent
Pass the signal through 2 BPF tuned to the 2 frequencies
and detect which has the larger output averaged over a Ts

s1(t ) s0 (t )
x

z ()dt z (t)
T

si ( t )

z1 ( T )

s1 ( t )
h(t) = s(Tb-t)

t T
h(t) = s(Tb-t)

BPF
Tuned @ f1

z (T )

y (t )

r (t )

r(t)

si (t )

z (T )

y (t )

Envelope
Detector

BPF
Tuned @ f2

Envelope
Detector

t T
Prof. Okey Ugweje

478

Binary FSK - 19

Department of Communications Engineering

r (t )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Federal University of Technology, Minna

479

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Sampler

Time
Sync
480

Binary FSK - 20

Binary FSK - 21

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Phase Locked Loop (PLL)

Probability of Error Performance for FSK


(see derivation in class handout)
Coherent

FG E IJ
H NK

Pb Q

Zero-Crossing:
One simple digital method involves counting the zerocrossings of the carrier during a symbol and hence
directly estimating the frequency on a symbol-by-symbol
basis

Noncoherent

F
H

E
Pb 1 exp b
2
2 No

I
K

Coherent orthogonal BFSK performance is identical to coherent ASK

Quadrature Receiver

Eb/N0 penalty of noncoh. detection is only about 1 dB lower

Alternate BFSK demodulator is shown in Fig. 4.16


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Note:noncoherent FSK performance is not nearly as bad as ASK


481

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

482

Example 40: FSK

Probability of Error (Bit Error Rate) - FSK


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Derivation

If a system's main performance criterion is bit error


probability, which of the following two modulation
schemes would be selected for an AWGN channel?
Show computations.
Binary noncoherent orthogonal FSK with Eb/NO = 13 dB
Binary coherent PSK with Eb/NO = 8 dB

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

483

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

484

Phase Shift Keying (PSK) - 1

Digital Communication System


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

In PSK, the phase of the carrier signal is switched


between 2 or more phases in response to the
baseband digital data
The info is contained in the instantaneous phase of
the carrier
For binary PSK, phase states of 0o and 180o are used

Phase Shift Keying

Waveform:

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

485

Phase Shift Keying (PSK) - 2

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

486

Phase Shift Keying (PSK) - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Analytical expression can be written as

si (t ) Ag (t ) cos ot i , 0 t T , i 1, 2,..., M
where
g(t) = transmitting signal pulse shape
A = amplitude of the signal
= carrier phase

Range of the carrier phase can be determined using


i

2 (i 1)
2 i
or i
M
M

For a rectangular pulse, we obtain


g (t )
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

487

Prof. Okey Ugweje

2
, 0 t T ; and assume A E
T
Federal University of Technology, Minna

488

Phase Shift Keying (PSK) - 4

Phase Shift Keying (PSK) - 5

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

We can now write the analytical expression as

Also can be written as

si (t )

2 Es
cos
T

0t

2 i 1
,
M

s (t )
i

0 t T , i 1, 2,..., M

Constant envelope

carrier phase changes abruptly at


the beginning of each signal interval

180-phase
shift

0-phase
shift

-90-phase
shift

2T

3T

4T

the carrier phase changes abruptly at the beginning of each


signal interval while the amplitude remains constant
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

489

Federal University of Technology, Minna

490

Phase Shift Keying (PSK) - 7

01

00

11

M_ary Constellations

01

00
11

10

011

3 5 7
4

01

There is no non-coherent detection equivalent for PSK

491

M 2k

MPSK

BPSK

4
8

QPSK
8 PSK

16

16 PSK

Prof. Okey Ugweje

001

010

E
11

This technique is known as Differential PSK (DPSK)

100

110

111

10

M=4
01

010

M=8

00
10

001

M=4

Federal University of Technology, Minna

110
111

101

011

11

000

It is also possible to transmit data encoded as the


phase change (phase difference) between
consecutive symbols

Federal University of Technology, Minna

00

10

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Department of Communications Engineering

3
0, , ,
2
2

2 i 1
M

2 (i 1)
2 (i 1)
2E
cos
cos c t sin
sin c t
M
M
T

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Phase Shift Keying (PSK) - 6


Department of Communications Engineering

cos c t

For M-ary phase modulation M = 2k, where k is the # of


info bits per transmitted symbol
In an M-ary system, one of M 2 possible symbols, s1(t),
, sm(t), is transmitted during each Ts-second signaling
interval
The mapping or assignment of k info bits into M = 2k
possible phases may be done in many ways, e.g. for M = 4

2E
T

000

100
101

M=8

492

Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) - 2

Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) - 1


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Is also called Phase Reversal Keying (PRK)


For BPSK, M = 2 and o = 0, 1 =

In your text, BPSK modulated signal is also written as


s (t ) m(t )

i.e.,2 carrier phases at o= 0 and 1 = rad are used to transmit data

There is a 1800 ( radian) phase shift


the two phases are separated by 180o
2 Es
T

s0 (t )
s1 (t )

v(t ) Re g (t )e

cos c t

2 Es
T

cos c t for binary 1

Federal University of Technology, Minna

493

Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) - 3

where g(t )

RS 1,
T1,

binary 1
binary 0

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

494

Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

The entire quadrature component is not used

The magnitude and phase of an OOK signal are:

This means that half the bandwidth is wasted


BPSK requires twice as much bandwidth as the polar line
code used to create it

si (t ) R(t ) cos( 0t i (t ))
where R (t ) 1, constant envelope
0,

binary1

(t )
, binary 0

If y(t) can be used, then loss in spectral efficiency is


recovered

1, binary1
x(t )
1, binary 0

The in-phase and quadrature components are:

s (t ) x(t ) cos( 0t ) y (t ) sin( 0t )

I-component is just the polar NRZ signal


If the second BPSK is transmitted as the Q-component,
then we have QPSK (quadrature PSK) signal

where y(t) = 0 and no Q component

Prof. Okey Ugweje

j c t

Complex envelope is entirely real


Complex envelope is equivalent to polar NRZ signaling
Imaginary portion of corresponds to Q component

Thus, binary phase modulated signal may be viewed as 2


quadrature carrier with amplitude depending on transmitted
phase of each signal
Prof. Okey Ugweje

cos 2 f c t c

where m(t) is the message waveform


Representation of BPSK
The complex envelope of an OOK signal is:

cos c t , for binary 0

2 Es
T

2 Es
T

Federal University of Technology, Minna

495

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

496

Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) - 6

Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) - 5


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

PSK Generation (Modulators)

Transmitters for PSK (Modulators)

The simplest means of realizing BPSK is to switch the sign


of fc with data signal, causing a 0 or 180 phase shift

Product modulators

This method is not too good because of the difficulty in


implementing bandpass high frequency, high Q filters

Differential encoding

Switching modulators

Receivers for PSK (Demodulators)

Coherent Receiver
Maximum Likelihood Detector
Square Law Detector
Correlator Detector or Costas Loop

Data stream may be pre-shaped at baseband prior to


modulation
Because the modulation process
is linear, the baseband filter
shape is imposed directly onto
the bandpass modulating signal
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Noncoherent Receiver

497

Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) - 7

Differential PSK

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) - 8

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Modulation/Transmitter Process

Power Spectral Density of PSK

s (t )
i

2 Es
T

cos


c t 2 Mi 1

498

a f LMMFGH sin aaffffffTT IJK FGH sin aaffffffTT IJK OPP


N
Q

P f Eb
2

2 (i 1)
2 (i 1)
2 Es
cos
cos c t sin
sin c t

M
M
T

or

P( f )

e insin c ( f f )T 0.25 s e insin c ( f f )T 0.25 s


A2 T
b
2

A2 T
b
2

Bandwidth 2 R

Product modulators

2
T

Bbpsk signal is identical to Bbask


assuming the same degree of
pulse shaping

Switching modulators
Differential encoding

In fact, a BPSK signal can be viewed as an ASK signal with


the carrier amplitudes as +A and A (rather than +A and 0)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

499

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

500

Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) - 9

Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) - 10

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Receiver for PSK (Demodulators)


Coherent Receiver
1. Low Pass Filtering
2. Maximum Likelihood Detector (matched filter &
correlator)
3. Square Law Detector
4. Correlator Detector/Costas Loop

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

1) Low Pass Filtering


Incoming data signal is mixed with a locally generated
carrier reference, and the difference component is selected
at the output
t T

r (t )

z(T )

si (t )

cos(t )

501

Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) - 11

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

502

Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) - 12


Department of Communications Engineering

2. Matched Filter

Noncoherent Receiver

h(t ) s(Tb t )

z(T )

z(t )

There is no noncoherent PSK because noncoherency implies no phase information


With no phase, there is no PSK
Instead, we use a pseudo noncoherent technique
known as Differential PSK (DPSK)

si (t )

t T

3. Correlator receiver
r (t )

LPF

Multiplying r(t) by receiver LO (say Accos(ct)) yields 2


components: a baseband component & a component at
2fc
LPF eliminates the high frequency component (@ 2fc )
The output of the LPF is sampled once per bit period
The sampled value z(T) is applied to a decision rule

Department of Communications Engineering

r (t )

z () dt
T

z(t )

t T

si (t )

z(T )

s1(t ) s0 (t )

4. Quasi-coherent square-law receiver


r (t )

Prof. Okey Ugweje

( )2

z () dt
T

z(t )

t T

z(T )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

si (t )

503

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

504

Examples

Probability of Error (Bit Error Rate) - FSK


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Probability of Error for BPSK

Example
Suppose that the binary PSK is used in transmitting info over
AWGN channel with power spectral density of N0/2 = 10-10
watts/Hz and Eb=A2T/2. Determine the signal amplitude
required to achieve an error probability of 10-6 if the data rate is
(a) 10 kbps, (b) 1Mbps

(see derivation in class notes or see class handout)


2 Eb
PB Q

N0

Example
Find the expected number of bit errors made in one day by the
following continuously operating coherent BPSK receiver. The
data rate is 5000 bits/s. The input digital waveforms are s1(t) =
Acos(w0t) and s2(t) = -Acos(w0t) where A = 1 mV and the singlesided noise power spectral density is N0 = 10-11 W/Hz. Assume
that signal power and energy per bit are normalized relative to a
1 ohm resistive load.
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

505

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Binary Differential PSK - 1

Federal University of Technology, Minna

506

Binary Differential PSK - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Binary DPSK is regarded as the noncoherent version of BPSK


Data is encoded in phase shift between successive symbols
rather than the actual value of the phase
The Basic Idea:

This requires differential encoding of the data


The idea is to come up with an encoding/decoding
scheme that will give the same decoded output
regardless of whether the received data is inverted
In DPSK, the carrier phase of the previous data bit can
be used as a reference

If ak = 0 then shift carrier phase by 180o


If ak = 1 then no shift in carrier phase
ak 1
0
0
1
1

D-BPSK

BPSK

Differential BPSK looks just like BPSK except that the phase shift are in
a different place
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

507

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

508

Binary Differential PSK - 3

Binary Differential PSK - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

If ak = 1, leave dk unchanged w.r.t. the previous bit


If ak = 0, change dk w.r.t. the previous bit
The encoded sequence {dk} is used to phase-shift a
carrier with phase angle 0 and representing symbols 1
and 0 respectively

Differential Data Encoding:


ak

dk1

dk

dk

RSd
Td

k 1,
k 1,

ak 0
ak 1

ak
0
0
1
1

Delay
Ts

ak

dk

dk 1 dk
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1

This encoding process is efficient since it does not


introduce any extra data bits and hence does not
affect the throughput

D-BPSK

The 1-bit delay can be realized very simply using a clocked shift register
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

509

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Binary Differential PSK - 5

Federal University of Technology, Minna

510

Binary Differential PSK - 6

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Differential Data Decoding:


The differential decoding process is equally simple to
implement using a 2nd exclusive-nor gate and a 1-bit
delay

Drawback of Differential Encoding/Decoding:


When single bit errors occur in the received data
sequence due to noise, they tend to propagate as
double bit errors
Error

dk
Delay
Ts

EX-NOR

ak

01101100

ak

dk1

dk1

dk
Delay
Ts

01111100

dk

Delay
Ts

EX-NOR

ak

dk1

Since the decoder is comparing the logic state of


current bit with previous bit, and if the previous bit is
in error, the next decoded bit will also be in error
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

511

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

512

Binary Differential PSK - 8

Binary Differential PSK - 7


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

DPSK Modulation:
DPSK combines two basic operations at the
transmitter
Differential encoding of the binary data, and
modulation

Demodulation of DPSK
r (t )

r
k

z () dt
T

x
Delay
T

r
k 1

t T

z(t )

si (t )

z(T )

Suboptimum Detector

See Fig. 4.17 (b)


x

z(t )

z0T ()dt

t T

r (t )

cos 0t
x

z(t )

z0T ()dt

z(T )

si (t )

x
T

sin 0t

Optimum Detector

Exercise:
Draw a matched filter implementation of the optimum
detector
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

513

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Department of Communications Engineering

BER Performance for DPSK


r (t )

x
Delay
T

x(t )

LPF

y(t )

In general, DPSK performs less than BPSK because the errors


tend to propagate due to correlation between bit waveforms
BPSK performs about 3 dB better than DPSK
The difference decreases with increasing Eb/No

t T

z(T )

si (t )

r
k 1

x(t ) A cos ot n(t ) A cos o (t Tb ) n(t Tb )

Differentially Encoded PSK (DEPSK)

y(t ) const A nc (t ) A nc (t Tb ) ns ns (t Tb )

514

Binary Differential PSK - 10

Binary Differential PSK - 9


Department of Communications Engineering

r(t ) s(t ) n(t )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Sometimes, differentially encoded PSK is coherently


detected (see section 4.7.2)
In this case, the probability of error is

PB Pr Z(Tb ) 0

1
E
PB exp b
2
N0
Theoretical performance for CPSK & DPSK is shown for an AWGN channel

2 Eb
PB 2Q
N0

2 Eb
1 Q

N0

BER for CPSK is exactly the same as that derived for bipolar baseband
transmission
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

515

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

516

Example 43 - DPSK

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

a) The bit stream 11011100101 is to be


transmitted using DPSK. Determine the
encoded sequence, the transmitted phase
sequence and the detected sequence.

M-ary Modulation

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

517

Prof. Okey Ugweje

518

M-ary Modulation Types Partial List

M-ary Digital Communications


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

In M-ary signaling scheme, we may send one of M = 2k possible


symbols, s1(t), s2(t), , sM(t) during each interval Ts
We refer to each M-ary message sequence as a character or
symbol
The rate at which M-ary symbols are transmitted through the channel
is called the Baud Rate
M-ary signals may be generated by changing the Amplitude,
Frequency or Phase of the carrier in M discrete steps resulting to the
following:
M-ary PSK
M-ary ASK
M-ary FSK
Another way of generating M-ary signals is to combine different
methods of modulation into a hybrid form e.g.,
Amplitude Phase Keying (APK) ASK + PSK

Abbreviation
MASK
MQAM
MFSK
MPSK
M=4
QPSK
/4 QPSK
OQPSK
DQPSK
/4 DQPSK
M>4
DMPSK
MSK
DMSK (GMSK)
MAPK

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Federal University of Technology, Minna

519

Descriptive Names
M-ary Amplitude Shift Keying
M-ary Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
M-ary Frequency Shift Keying
M-ary Phase Shift Keying
Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
/4 Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying
Differential QPSK
/4 Differential QPSK
MPSK (e.g, 8-PSK, 16-PSK, 64-PSK, etc., )
Differential MPSK
Minimum Shift Keying
Differential MSK (Gaussian MSK)
M-ary Amplitude Phase Keying
Federal University of Technology, Minna

520

M-ary vs. Binary

Practical Modulation Schemes


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Modulation Type
Applications
FM (analog) AMPS
MSK
CT2
GMSK
GSM, DCS 1800, CT3, DECT, HIPERLAN-1
QPSK
NADC (CDMA) - base transmitter
OQPSK
NADC (CDMA) - mobile transmitter
4-DQPSK
NADC (TDMA), PDC, PHP (Japan)
/4-DQPSK
N. A. TDMA, PHS
QPSK/OQPSK CDMA One
QAM
IEEE 802.11 (5.7 GHz), HIPERLAN-2
GFSK
Bluetooth, IEEE 802.11-FHSS)
DPSK
IEEE 802.11-DSSS
CCK
IEEE 802.11-DSSS

Each symbol in an M-ary alphabet can be related to a


unique sequence of k-bits

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

521

M 2k k log 2 M

where M is the size of the alphabet


Rs

Rb bits
k log 2 M

Ts
Ts
log 2 M s

Tb

1 Ts
1

Rb k kRs

Any digital system that transmits k bits in Ts seconds using


bandwidth efficiency of

Rb log 2 M
1

bits / s / Hz
B
BTs
BTb
Any digital system will become bandwidth efficient if its BTb is
increase

Federal University of Technology, Minna

522

Quadrature PSK (QPSK) - 1

Digital Communication System


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

QPSK (4PSK) is just 2 BPSK


arranged in phasequadrature, each operating
at half the bit rate of the
original bit stream
It transmits 2-bit of info using
4 states of phases

Quadrature PSK (QPSK)

2 bits are transmitted per


modulation symbol 2Tb=Ts)

The I and Q channels are


aligned and phase transition
occur once every Ts = 2Tb
seconds with a maximum at
180 degrees
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

523

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

524

Quadrature PSK (QPSK) - 2

Quadrature PSK (QPSK) - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Example QPSK encoding

The signals are:

2-bit
information

00

01

/2

10

11

3/2

Each symbol
corresponds to two bits

General expression:
sQPSK (t )

2E

s
T
s

cos 2 f ot

2 (i 1)
,
M

i 1, 2,3, 4

0 t Ts

Also can be written as


si (t )

2 Eb
Tb

2 (i 1)
2 (i 1)

sin c t sin
cos c t cos M
M

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

525

s1

2 Es
Ts

cos c t

s2

2 Es
Ts

cos c t

s3

2 Es
Ts

cos c t

s4

2 Es
Ts

cos c t

2E

sin c t

2 Es
Ts

cos c t

s
T
s

(see next slide for


illustration)

3
2

s1,3 (t )

2 Es
Ts

cos 2 f ot ,

shift of 0o and 180o

s2,4 (t )

2 Es
Ts

sin 2 f ot ,

shift of 90o and 270o

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Quadrature PSK (QPSK) - 4

2 Es
Ts

sin c t

Federal University of Technology, Minna

526

Quadrature PSK (QPSK) - 5

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

In terms of basis functions


1 (t )

2
Ts

cos 2 f o t

and 1 (t )

2
Ts

sin 2 f ot

we can write sQPSK(t) as


01 s
1

11

s2

sQPSK (t )

00
s0

s3

Es

cos

2 (i 1)
(t ) Es
M 1

sin

2 (i 1)
(t )
M 2

With this expression, the constellation diagram can easily be


drawn
10 Q
Q
For example:
Es

10

00

10

00

11

01

11

0,
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

527

Prof. Okey Ugweje

01

, ,

3
2

Federal University of Technology, Minna

2 Es

3 5 7
, , ,
4 4 4 4

528

Quadrature PSK (QPSK) - 6

Quadrature PSK (QPSK) - 7

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

QPSK Modulator:
I

A
2

RS
T

1
m2
1

A
2

R
Rs b
2

m2 (t )cos ot

cos ot
~ A cos ot

Serial-toParrallel
Converter

m(t)

Rb T1
b

R
Rs b
2

90

R
Rs b
2
m1

RS11
T

A sin t
o
2

A
2

SystemView

m1(t )sin ot

Federal University of Technology, Minna

529

2.5e-3

5.e-3

7.5e-3

10.e-3

12.5e-3

2.5e-3

5.e-3

7.5e-3

10.e-3

12.5e-3

1.5

Amplitude

Source data is first split into 2 data streams (often by allocating alternate bits
to the upper and lower modulator)
with each data stream runs at half the rate of the input data stream
Think of m1 & m2 as bit stream that modulates the quadrature carriers
In QPSK the Tx is 2 BPSK Transmitters arranged in phase-quadrature, each
operating at half the bit rate of the original bit stream
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Modulated QPSK (t22)


0

500.e-3
-500.e-3
-1.5

Time in Seconds

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Quadrature PSK (QPSK) - 8

Federal University of Technology, Minna

530

Quadrature PSK (QPSK) - 9

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

QPSK Demodulator:
QPSK receiver is composed of 2 BPSK receivers
one that locks on to the sine carrier and
the other that locks onto the cosine carrier
x

z ()dt
T

z1(t ) t T z1(T )

1(t)

r (t )

1 (t ) A cos o t

()dt

z0 (t )

z0 (T )

si ( t )

Compare
Z1 and Z0

2 (t ) A sin o t

2 (t)

z1(t )

z0T s1(t) 1(t)dt z0T a A cos otfa A cos otfdt A2Ts

zo ( t )

s (t ) 2 (t )dt

Ts
0 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Ts
0

Lo

a A cos t fa A sin t fdt 0


o

Federal University of Technology, Minna

531

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

532

Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) - 10


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Implementation of QPSK

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

533

Quadrature PSK (QPSK) - 12

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

534

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Phase Diagrams:
s

45o

s3

Offset QPSK

Phase changes: 0, 90o, 180o

In QPSK phase transition between all the states are


possible
Since transition through the origin is possible (phase shift
of p), the signal envelope can pass through zero
momentarily
This could lead to errors or signal loss during transmission
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

535

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

536

Offset QPSK - 1

Offset QPSK - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Offset Quadrature Phase Shift Keying (OQPSK), also called


staggered QPSK (SQPSK) is a modified version of QPSK
Recall that in QPSK, the bit transition in I- & Q-channels occur
simultaneously
However, in OQPSK, I-channel (or Q-channel) bit stream is
offset by one bit period relative to Q-channel (or I-channel) prior
to modulation
Notice that the I and Q channels
are not aligned
This misalignment implies that
only one phase transition can
occur once every Ts = Tb sec with
a maximum at 90o
Q-channel: even bits, mI(t)
I-channel: odd bits, mQ(t)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

537

Offset QPSK - 3

Offset between I and Q means that transition is potentially


possible every Tb sec
OQPSK can be used to achieve a non-zero envelope in the
modulated signal
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

538

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

For OQPSK, symbol transition across the origin (phase


changes of 180o) is prohibited (Compare this to QPSK)

Unlike QPSK, signal transition do not


pass through the origin

Differential QPSK (DQPSK)


QPSK

OQPSK

OQPSK is a constant envelope modulation scheme that is


attractive for systems using nonlinear transponders, e.g.,
satellite communication
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

539

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

540

/4 QPSK - 1

Differential QPSK (DQPSK)


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

For M = 4, the PSK signal can be considered as 2 BPSK


signals using sint and cost as carriers

Another variant of QPSK which is now widely used in


majority of digital radio modems is the /4 QPSK format

The 4-phases can then be differentially encoded by encoding 2


BPSK signals differentially as discussed
i.e., DQPSK modulator uses same differential data encoder for
each parallel data stream as binary DPSK counterpart

It is so called because the 4 symbol set is rotated by /4 or


45o at every new symbol transition
450

450

It employs the same principle of using a 1 symbol delayed


version of the received symbol stream to act as the
reference for demodulation
Symbol 1

Symbol 2

Symbol 3

/4 rotating symbol set

Time

The reason for this rotation is to ensure that the


modulation envelope of the QPSK signal never passes
through zero
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

541

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

542

/4 QPSK - 3

/4 QPSK - 2
Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

The fact that the modulation envelope does not pass


through zero is important for the design of radio power
amplifiers

/4-QPSK is a compromise between QPSK and QPSK


It performs better in multipath environment
It is possible to differentially encode /4 QPSK /4DQPSK
/4-QPSK is widely used because it can be noncoherently
detected
/4-QPSK Mapping:

Qk

Ik

Comparing the vector diagrams for QPSK and /4 QPSK,


this property is clearly evident

Data bits
mI, mQ

Phase shift
T=2mTs

Phase shift
T=(2m+1)Ts

Since envelope never goes through zero, /4 QPSK


mitigates spectral spreading caused by system nonlinearity

00

-3/4

01

3/4

/2

/4-QPSK differs from QPSK in that I-Q phases of 0 & /2 &


those of /4 & /4 are alternatively changed every Ts sec

10

-/4

-/2

11

/4

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

543

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Modulation

Max pahsechange

OQPSK

180o
90o

/ 4 QPSK

135o

QPSK

Federal University of Technology, Minna

544

Generalized M-ary Differential PSK - 1

Generalized M-ary Differential PSK - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

For the case of M > 2, the signal can also be differentially


encoded using the phase comparisons

For differentially coherent detection of DPSK it is given


by

FG
H

Increasing M > 4 allows further improvements in


bandwidth efficiency, but the additional symbol states are
no longer orthogonal

PE ( M ) 2Q

2 Es
sin
No
2M

IJ
K

they do not lie on the sine or cosine axis of constellation diagram

Error Probability Performance:


BER is difficult to compute
Symbol error probability for general M-ary PSK is given
by

FG
H

PE ( M ) 2Q
Prof. Okey Ugweje

2 Es
sin
No
M

IJ
K

Federal University of Technology, Minna

545

Prof. Okey Ugweje

M-ary ASK

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Orthogonal M-ary FSK - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Generation and detection process is scaled up, requiring multi-level symbol


mapping and comparison

Recall that in M-ary FSK we have M transmitted


signals si(t), i = 1,2, , M having waveforms
si (t )

s
T
s

cos 2 f o t 2 ift , i 1, 2, , M , 0 t Ts

A minimum frequency separation is required

MASK is not practically useful because of

i i 1

its relatively poor BER performance

Ts

or f i fi 1

1
, where Ts Tb log 2 M
2Ts

Modulator is same as BFSK and individual


frequencies are separated by 1/2Ts

its sensitivity to any gain variations in the


channel
its need for reasonable linearity in the
transceiver processing

For coherent MFSK, the Rx consist of bank of Mcorrelators or MF

Only BASK is usually used in practice


Federal University of Technology, Minna

2E

f f i fi 1 , fi f o if

Detection of MASK is performed with the same methods employed with


binary ASK for either coherent or non-coherent detection

Prof. Okey Ugweje

546

547

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

548

Orthogonal M-ary FSK - 3

Orthogonal M-ary FSK - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Probability of Error Performance:


Unlike M-ary ASK, M-ary FSK is important because of
its increased noise immunity compared to binary FSK

PE ( M ) M 1 Q

E
N

M 1 Q
o

kE
b
N
o

(eqn.
3.122)

coherent

Federal University of Technology, Minna

k 1

549

Orthogonal M-ary FSK - 4

FH

M 1
kEs
exp
k
k 1
(k 1) No
M
E M
E
1 exp s (1)k
exp s
k
M
No k 2
(k ) No
E
M 1 exp s
2
2 No

PE ( M )

noncoherent

Prof. Okey Ugweje

IK F
I
H
K
FH IK F
F I
I
H K
H
K
F I
H K

M 1 (1)k 1

MFSK is good for reliable data transmission in the


presence of high levels of noise

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

550

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

As the number of symbol states


increases, the symbol averaging time
becomes very large, reducing the
effect of noise to almost zero

Quadrature Amplitude
Modulation
The Eb/N0 required for error-free transmission will thus
approach the Shannon-Hartley limit of -1.6 dB
M-ary FSK is a very effective modulation technique in
applications where the optimum performance in noise is
required
for example in deep space missions where the path loss is so great
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

551

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

552

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation - 1

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

The most commonly used combination of amplitude


and phase signaling is the Quadrature Amplitude
Modulation (QAM)

It is sometimes regarded as M-ary APK with


constraints put on the amplitude and phase
si (t )

Some books regard it as an extension of the QPSK


since it consist of two independent amplitudemodulated carrier in quadrature. i.e.,
si (t )

where

2E
[ai cos ot bi sin ot ]
T

Rb
m n

In this case, both the amplitude and phase can be


varied

Any combination of M1-level amplitude and M2-level


phase can be used in the construction of QAM

si (t ) g (t )[ai cos o t bi sin o t ]


where g(t) is the signal pulse shaping function
Federal University of Technology, Minna

Rs

M 1 2m , M 2 2n , m n log 2 M 1M 2 ,

where ai and bi are amplitude levels obtained by


mapping k-bit sequence into amplitudes, or

Prof. Okey Ugweje

2E
Vi cos[ ot j ], i 1, 2, , M 1 , j 1, 2, , M 2
T

553

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation - 3

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

554

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Any combination of M1-level amplitude and M2-level


phase can be used in the construction of QAM
QAM waveform can be represented as a linear
combination of 2 orthogonal signals 1(t) and 2(t)

Using the vector representation, we can realize an Lby-L matrix representing the coordinates of (ai, bi)
( L 3, L 1)
( L 1, L 1)
( L 1, L 3) ( L 3, L 3)
{a , b }
i i

( L 1, L 1) ( L 3, L 1)

si (t ) Ai1 (t ) Bi2 (t )
where
1 (t )

2
T
s

cos[ ot ], 2 (t )

2
T
s

sin[ ot ]

where
L M

In vector notation:
si si1 , si 2 Ai E , Bi E
Prof. Okey Ugweje

( L 1, L 1)
( L 1, L 3)

( L 1, L 1)

ai , bi

Federal University of Technology, Minna

555

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

556

The 4-QAM and 8-QAM constellations

16-QAM constellations

Department of Communications Engineering

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Department of Communications Engineering

Federal University of Technology, Minna

557

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

558

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation - 8

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation - 7


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

MQAM Modulator:

Conventional M-ary QAM Modulation


I

A serial-to-parallel
converter divides the
incoming data stream
into two bit stream each
at one-half the rate

fb
2

fb

fb
2
Q

Federal University of Technology, Minna

559

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Premod
LPF

DSB-SC
AM Mod
X

0o

fb 1
2 log2 L

Data
Slicer

Then each branch is applied to a DSB-SC AM modulator


The output of both quadrature is added to yield an MQAM
signal
Although the modulator above is for 16QAM, it is good for any
M-ary QAM by changing the level shifter
Prof. Okey Ugweje

2-to-L-level
converter

LO

Phase
split

BPF

IF AMP

90o
2-to-L-level
converter

Premod
LPF

DSB-SC
AM Mod

Federal University of Technology, Minna

560

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation - 9

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation - 10

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Correlator Receiver Structure:

M-ary QAM Demodulation:

r (t )

z0T ()dt

2
cos o t
T

Threshold
and
Decision
Logic

2
sin o t
T

z0T ()dt

si ( t )

tT

With this receiver, any QAM signal can be recovered


with only two correlators
The output of the correlators give a point on the signal
constellation

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

561

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation - 11

This demodulator uses I & Q


remodulation of the received signal
It can be used to demodulate any MQAM signal by changing
the level shifter
Level shifter can be implemented by A/D flash decoder
consisting of M-1 comparators each which is set at various
M-threshold levels
Their output are sampled and applied to parallel-to-serial
converter
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation - 12

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

QAM Signal Constellation

16-QAM Constellations

Signal space diagram (constellation) is very important


in QAM
This is because any combination of M1-level amplitude
and M2-level phase (or amplitude) can be used to
construct M=M1M2 QAM signal
QAM allows the signal vectors to be placed anywhere
on the constellation plane
Usually, signal points are placed at equally spaced
distance
A particular constellation gives rise to different
probability of error
Prof. Okey Ugweje

562

Federal University of Technology, Minna

563

Type I QAM (Star Constellation)


C. R. Cahn, 1960
Type II QAM Constellation
J. C. Hancock and R. W. Lucky
Type III QAM Constellation
Compopiano & Glazer, 1962; J. Salz, J. R. Sheenhan, & D.J. Paris 1971
Q

Type I

Type II

Type III

16 QAM (8, 8)

16 QAM (4, 12)

16 QAM (4, 8, 4)

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

564

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation - 14

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation - 13


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Since we desire min radial distance, but max


separation between points the square constellation is
easier to implement and has a slightly better
probability of error performance
Type I and Type II constellations are not preferred for
Gaussian channels
need higher energy to achieve the same min
distance compared to Type III

QAM is used by high-speed wireline modems


Allows data rates of 9,600 bps and above over
ordinary telephone lines
9,600 bps modem uses 16-QAM or 32-QAM (V.22
and V.32)
14.4 kbps uses 128-QAM
28.8 kbps uses 512-QAM

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

565

Federal University of Technology, Minna

566

General Decision Rule for M-ary - 1

Quadrature Amplitude Modulation - 15


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Comparing the constellation diagrams of M-ary QAM


with M-ary PSK we can see that the spacing between
symbol states for QAM is greater than that for PSK

Once a point on the signal constellation plane is determined for


the received signal, a decision can be made
The decision rule is to pick the signal point that is closest to
the received point
The distance between the signal point and the received point is
a function of the noise in the environment during the symbol
interval
If the noise has moved the received point closer to a different
signal point, then the receiver will make an error

This is because PSK constellation are restricted to


symbol states of equal amplitude and thus on a circle
equidistant from the origin
The larger spacing between symbols for QAM means
that the detection process should be less susceptible
to noise

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

567

Prof. Okey Ugweje

RSIf the receiver


Tcalculates this point

RSThen, it will pick the symbol


Tcorresponding to this signal point

Federal University of Technology, Minna

568

General Decision Rule for M-ary - 2

General Decision Rule for M-ary - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Thus, for decision purposes, we partition the signal


constellation diagram into decision regions
min Euclidean distance amongst phasors gives rise to noise
immunity
the min distance between any pair of signal vectors is

In a special case where amplitudes take discrete values (2i-1M)d, constellation is rectangular

nb

g b

dij si s j 1 E ai a j 2 bi bj
2

s1

d min d 2 E

gs

1 (t )

s2

Federal University of Technology, Minna

569

BER Performance for QAM - 1

1b
a

IK

Min separation between signal points determines PE(M)


Energy of signal depends on the radial distance from origin to
signal point
desire minimum radial distance, but max separation between
points
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

570

BER Performance for QAM - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

The exact performance of QAM depends on the shape of a


particular signal constellation diagram
For a rectangular constellation, the probability of correct
detection is
2
PC ( M ) 1 P M

where P M 2 1

1
M

3 Eav

( M 1) N
o

PE ( M ) 1 PC ( M ) 1 1 P M

For this odd-bit constellation root of


M is not an integer

It is not possible to gray encode

I
d

5-bit QAM Constellation

Hence the probability of error is given by

A general performance of coherent QAM (even or odd), the


symbol error probability can be bounded as (M > 4)

3 Eav
3 kEb
PE ( M ) 1 1 2Q
4Q
( M 1) N o
( M 1) N o

Eav is the average energy per bit


k is the number of bits per symbol

This probability of error is exact for M =


k is even
That is, a rectangular QAM (Type III) can only be
implemented when k = 2M (even)
Odd-bit constellations add complexities to the CODEC
2k,

Prof. Okey Ugweje

FH

(a, b) a b cos o t tan

Minimum phase rotation amongst constellation points


determines the phase jitter immunity
resilience against clock recovery imperfections & channel
phase rotations
Peak-to-average phase power ratio
robustness against nonlinear distortion of power amplifier
Prof. Okey Ugweje

2 (t ) Q

Federal University of Technology, Minna

571

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

, k 1

572

Variants of QAM - 1

BER Performance for QAM - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Offset QAM Modulation


I

2-to-L-level
converter

Premod
LPF

fb
2

fb

PB ( M )

Data
Slicer

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

573

Phase
split

LO

2-to-L-level
converter

Premod
LPF

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Superposed M-ary QAM Modulation

Variable Rate QAM Modulations

Data
input

QPSK
Modulator

Serial-to-2x2 bit
paralel converter

574

Variants of QAM - 3
Department of Communications Engineering

BPSK
BPF

IF AMP

s (t ) a2 k h t 2kT cos c t a2 k 1h t 2k 1 T sin c t


k

Variants of QAM - 2

BPF

DSB-SC
AM Mod

Department of Communications Engineering

LO

90o

The improvement of 16-QAM over 16-PSK comes from the


noise immunity capability of QAM
However, the design requirements of QAM is more complicated
needing to handle both amplitude and phase

DSB-SC
AM Mod

0o

fb
2

2(1 M 1 ) 3log 2 M 2 Eb
Q

2 1) N
log M
M
(
2
o

Half
Symbol
Delay

QPSK

2-level QPSK

32-level Star
QAM

16 Star QAM
Type 1

IF AMP

64-level Star
QAM

QPSK
Modulator

QAM transmission over Rayleigh Fading Channel


Burst error due to deep fades
Varying the modulation levels in response to fading
conditions

Be able to use built-in PSK MODEMs in realization


Less efficient than the conventional QAM
implementation

Suitable for data transmission


Variable QAM constellation
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

575

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

576

Trellis-Coded Modulation - 1

Trellis-Coded Modulation - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Combined coding and modulation scheme


TCM achieves coding gain without BW expansion and reduction
of effective information rate
Both power and bandwidth efficient
In power limited environment:
Use error correcting code increases power efficiency
Requires higher rate higher bandwidth
In bandwidth limited environment:
Choose higher-order modulation increases spectral
efficiency
Larger signal power is needed for the same signal separation
TCM combines the choice of higher-order modulation with
convolutional code
TCM achieves coding gain without BW expansion and reduction
of effective information rate

TCM is classified into two basic types


Lattice type MPAM and MQAM
Better power efficiency
Constant amplitude type MPSK
Lower power efficiency, better over satellite channel
Observations:
We can use coding gain without BW expansion
Coding and modulation are not separate entities
Demodulation and decoding in single step
Performance is governed by free Euclidean distance not
free hamming distance of the code
Optimization of TCM is based on the free Euclidean
distance
Detection is based on soft decision

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

577

Summary list of Digital MODEM - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Binary Modulation Schemes


Amplitude Shift Keying or ON-OFF Keying
Coherent and Noncoherent
Frequency Shift Keying (FSK) or Continuous-Phase FSK
Coherent and Noncoherent
Phase Shift Keying (PSK)
Coherent and Differential PSK
M-ary (multi-level) Modulation Schemes
M-ary Amplitude Shift Keying (MASK)
M-ary Frequency Shift Keying (MFSK)
M-ary Phase Shift Keying (MPSK)

QPSK, Differential QPSK, OQPSK, /4 PSK and /4 QPSK

M-ary Amplitude Phase Keying (MAPK)


Quadrature Amplitude Modulation (MQAM)
Federal University of Technology, Minna

578

Summary list of Digital MODEM - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University
of Technology,
Minna
Part 5: Digial Bandpass
Communication

579

Minimum Shift Keying (MSK) or Fast Frequency Shift Keying


Differential MPSK (MPSK)
Differential Encoded MPSK (DEMPSK)
Differential MSK (DMSK)
Gaussian MSK (GMSK)
Superposed QAM (SQAM)
/4 Differential PSK
Quadrature Partial Response (QPR)
Sinusoidal Frequency Shift Keying (SFSK)
Comparison of Modulation Schemes
For practical application, the choice of digital MODEM depends on:
bandwidth efficiency,
power efficiency,
error performance,
Complexity of implementation, and
Cost

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

580

Power Efficiency - 1

Summary list of Digital MODEM - 3


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Probability of symbol error or Probability of bit error is related to:


Power efficiency
Bandwidth efficiency (spectral efficiency)
The performance of modulation schemes is summarized based on BER and
complexity
Usually transmitted power and complexity increases with increase in
bandwidth efficiency
The linear or nonlinear nature of the channel also affect the choice of
digital MODEM
Lastly, but not the least, government regulations also affect the choice of
digital MODEM
A desirable characteristics of any modulation scheme is the simultaneous
conservation of bandwidth and power
This has lead to the combination of coding and modulation (also known
as Trellis Coded Modulation)

Definition:
Power Efficiency (), is a measure of how much received
power is needed to achieve a specified bit error rate
Power efficient modulation schemes requires less power for
satisfactory BER
is a function of signal-to-noise ratio (SNR)
In the computation of , it is assumed that:
All modulation levels occur with equal probability, 1/M
Gray encoding is used to map the information bits into levels
Differential encoding may be employed
Power efficient modems are not bandwidth efficient (next 2
slides)
Power efficient schemes are more appropriate for satellite &
mobile communications

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

581

Power Efficiency - 2

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Power Efficiency - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Power efficient modulation schemes include:


BPSK (or equivalently DSB-SC-AM in analog
system)
QPSK and 4-QAM
Assuming both I- and Q-channel is an unfiltered
balanced NRZ bit stream
BPSK and QPSK
is 2 b/s/Hz theoretical (1.5 ~ 1.8 b/s/Hz
practical)
Low Eb/No for good error probability performance
Relatively simple hardware design

Summary of Power efficient modulation


More appropriate for satellite communications
systems
BPSK and QPSK
Requires less power for satisfactory BER
They are not bandwidth efficient modulation
Expressed in terms of SNR for required BER
Power efficient:
If a Pe= 10-8 requires an Eb / No < 14 dB

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

582

583

Federal University of Technology, Minna

584

Bandwidth Efficiency - 1

Bandwidth Efficiency - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Definition:
Bandwidth efficiency () is the ratio of the bit rate to
channel bandwidth expressed in bit per second per
hertz (b/s/Hz)
It is also called Spectral Efficiency
The primary objective of spectrally efficient modulation
is to maximize the bandwidth efficiency
With data rate denoted as R, and the channel
bandwidth by B, then Bandwidth Efficiency is given
as

Rb
1

log 2 M 2 bits / s / Hz
B BTb

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

In theory, BT 1 (for role-off-factor, = 0)


In practice, > 0, out-of-band emission constraints
imposed by FCC spectrum regulation
T is well defined, but B is not - hence of a digitally
modulated signal depends on the definition adopted for B

Capacity of a digital communication system is directly


related to
The max possible bandwidth efficiency is
max

C
S bps

log 2 1
B
N Hz

Note that binary systems are more power efficient, but


less spectral efficient than M-ary systems
585

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Bandwidth Efficiency - 3

Federal University of Technology, Minna

586

Bandwidth Efficiency - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Note that bandwidth efficient modem are not power


efficient
Spectrally efficient modems include:

Summary of Bandwidth efficient modulation


More appropriate for microwave radio
M-ary level schemes (MPSK, MQAM) (M > 4)
Can transmit more information bit / BW
They are not power efficient modulation
Expressed in terms of Rb/B (b/s/Hz)
Spectral Efficiency:
If spectral efficiency > 2 b/s/Hz

M-ary QAM
In theory, = 4, 6, & 8 b/s/Hz for 16-, 64-, and 256QAM, respectively
But in practice we have, 2.5-3.5, 4.5-5, & 5-6, respectively

Available Eb/No > 30 dB

Usually, in spectral efficient modulation, the common


carrier band is subdivided into channels of width B
4-, 6-, 11-GHz bands in the USA have channel
bandwidths of 20, 30, and 40 MHz, respectively

More appropriate for digital microwave radio


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

587

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

588

Comparison of Digital MODEM - 1

Spectral Efficiency Plane


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

How do I compare one modulation format to another?


Bandwidth of Coherent Binary Modulation Schemes
Rectangular Pulses

Raised Cosine

ASK

2/T

(1+r)/T

FSK

4/T

2(1+r)/T

PSK

2/T

(1+r)/T

Comparison of some PSK Modulation Schemes


Modulation
Scheme

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

589

Comparison of Digital MODEM - 2


Bandwidth Efficiency,

Immunity to
Nonlinearity

Implementation
Complexity

0.5

D (worst)

a (simple)

2.0

1.0

9.6 dB

2.0

1.0

9.6 dB

N/A

2/3

A (best)

d (complex)

EbNo
(dB)

Nyquist

Null-to-Null

BPSK

9.6 dB

1.0

QPSK

9.6 dB

PSK, QAM
Coherent FSK
Noncoherent FSK
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Required
CNR

BPSK

10.6 dB

Rb

10.6 dB

QPSK

10.6 dB

0.5Rb

13.6 dB

8-PSK

14.0 dB

0.33Rb

18.8 dB

16-PSK

18.3 dB

0.25Rb

24.3 dB

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Pb = 10-6

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Pb = 10-5

590

Bandwidth Efficiency of M-ary PSK

16

32

64

(bits/s/Hz)

0.5

1.0

1.5

2.0

2.5

3.0

Bandwidth Efficiency of M-ary FSK

Bandwidth Efficiency of some Modulation Schemes

M-ary System

Max
(bits/s/Hz)

Department of Communications Engineering

Modulation
Scheme

MSK

Min Channel B for


ISI free signaling

Comparison of Digital MODEM - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

OQPSK

Required
Eb/No

Bandwidth Efficiency bits/s/Hz

16

32

64

(bits/s/Hz)

1.0

1.0

0.75

0.5

0.3125

0.1875

1 log M
2 2

2log 2 M
M 3
log M
2
2M

Assuming frequency separation of Rs/2


Assuming frequency separation of 2Rs/2

Federal University of Technology, Minna

591

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

592

Comparison of Digital MODEM - 4

Comparison of Digital MODEM - 5

Department of Communications Engineering

Assuming PB 10
Modulation
Scheme

Department of Communications Engineering

Complexity of Modulation Schemes

Bandwidth,
B

Eb/No
(dB)

Equipment
Complexity

coh. ASK

2Rb

14.45

Moderate

noncoh. ASK

2Rb

18.33

Major

Rarely used;

o A/2

o A2Tb / 4
Peo Pe1

coh. FSK

2Rb

10.60

Minor

Seldom used
Performance does not justify complexity
0 0

noncoh. FSK

2Rb

15.33

Minor

Used for slow speed data transmission


Poor utilization of power and bandwidth
0 0

coh. PSK

2Rb

8.45

Major

Used for high speed data transmission


Better overall performance but requires
complex equipment
0 0

Differential
PSK

2Rb

9.30

Major

Most commonly used in medium speed


data transmission
Error tend to occur in pairs
0 0

Prof. Okey Ugweje

BPSK
QAM, QPSK
OQPSK
MSK
CPFSK - optimal detection
QPR
M-ary PSK
APK

Comments

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Low

High

Complexity
DQPSK
DPSK
CPFSK -discriminator detection
FSK - noncoherent detection
OOK - envelope detection

IEEE 1979
593

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

594

Probability of Error Calculation - 1

Digital Communication System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

What is the difference between symbol error and bit error?


Probability of symbol error vs. Probability of bit error?
One important parameter of communication systems is the
SNR or the Eb/No defined as:
b

Probability of Error Calculations

2
Eb A2Tb
A2

A
No
No
No (1 / Tb ) NoW

Also, p. 158 of your textbook defines


b

e j

e j

Eb STb

S SW S W S W
No No RNo RNoW NoW R
N R

where S = Average message signal power


N = Noise variance NoW
W = Bandwidth
R = Rate
1
Eb
Eavg
log 2 M
Generally,
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

595

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

596

Probability of Error Calculation - 2

Probability of Error Calculation - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Symbol Energy and SNR per Symbol:

Bit Energy and SNR per Bit

Consider the signals sm, m = 1, 2, , M


Assume symbols are equiprobable

Bit rate is R

P( sm )

1
M

Bit Rate
RT log2 M
Symbol Rate

, m 1, 2,, M

Energy of signal m is Em: (called Es if Em is equal for all m)


Average energy per symbol
Eav

1
M

Em , ( Es if Em equalfor all m)

Average Power

m1

Pav Eav R ( Eb R if Em is equal for all m)

Average power
Pav

Eav
,
T

1
where the symbol rate is
T

Average SNR per bit

Average SNR per symbol


S Eav

N No

Es
No

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Eb av

if Em equal for all m)


Federal University of Technology, Minna

Average Energy per bit


Eav
(called Eb Es if Em is equal for all m)
Eb av
log 2 M

N0
597

Probability of Error Calculation - 4

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

598

Probability of Error Calculation - 5

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Error Probability:
Probability of bit error is Pb
Probability of symbol error is Pe or PM or P(M)
We can compare modulation schemes in terms of the
Eb/No required to achieve a specified or Pe or Pb
Generally,
1
Pe ( M )
log 2 M
Relation between Pe and Pb for Orthogonal Signals

The number of symbols conveying an incorrect bit in one


of the log2M positions is M/2
The probability of having an incorrect bit in any one of the
log2M positions is
M
1

2 M 1

The probability of bit error is


Pb

Pb

Since the Euclidean distance between any 2 signals is


the same, there is no benefit to Gray coding
When a symbol error occurs, each of the (M-1) remaining
symbols is chosen with probability (1/M-1)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Eav
E
Es
( b
if Em is equal for all m)
log 2 M N o
N o log 2 M N o

Federal University of Technology, Minna

599

M
Pe
2( M 1)

Relation between Pe and Pb and for PAM, QAM, PSK


Assume that Gray coding is used, then the most probable
symbol errors cause exactly one bit error each, since
each symbol encodes bits:
Hence Pb 1 Pe ( M )
log 2 M

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

600

Probability of Error Calculation - 6

Probability of Error of Modulation Schemes - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Modulation

Probability of Symbol Error for M-ary Orthogonal


Signals
Coherent Exact
1
2

PM

c z

y
1
2

x2
2

M 1

exp 21 y

2 Es
No

FG
H

Es
No

PM

n 1

( )

n 1

Orthogonal

IJ
K

Bandpass Systems
Es
Q
BASK (OOK)
N0

FG M 1IJ 1 expFG nE IJ
H n K n 1 H (n 1) N K
s

BFSK

All Cases
1
Pb
PM
2( M 1)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

BPSK

Es
Eb
log 2 M
Federal University of Technology, Minna

601

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Pb (noncoherent)

2 Eb
Q

No

dy

Noncoherent Exact
M 1

Pb (coherent)

Baseband Systems
Antipodal

Coherent Union Bound


PM M 1Q

PM (coherent)


Es
N0


2Es
No

Eb
N 0

Eb
N 0
Eb
N 0

2
1 exp A

2
8N0

1 exp Eb

2
2 N0

2 Eb
N 0

1 exp Eb
N
2
0

Federal University of Technology, Minna

602

Probability of Error of Modulation Schemes - 2

Probability of Error of Modulation Schemes - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Modulation
QPSK
OQPSK

PM (coherent)

2 Es
2Q

N0
2 Es

2Q
sin
M
N0

DPSK

2Q

F
H

6 log2 MEb
( M 2 1) No

MASK

2( M 1)
M Q

MFSK

( M 1)Q

MPSK
Prof. Okey Ugweje

2Q

I
K


kEb
N0

2 Eb log 2 M
N0

Modulation

Pb (coherent) Pb (noncoherent)

sin M


2 Eb
N0

2Es
Q

N0

1 Q
2( M 1)
M

1 exp Eb
No
2

2 Eb
N0

Eb
N0

Eb
( M 2 1) No


Q 2Q
kEb
N0

( M 1)Q

Federal University of Technology, Minna

2 Eb
N0

Eb

M 1 e 2 No
2
4 Es
N0

sin M
603

2 Es
N0

Es
N0

3kEs
( M 1) N0

MDPSK

2Q

/4QPSK

2Q

MQAM

PM (coherent)

4Q

sin M

sin

MSK

2 Es
N0

GMSK
0.68

2 Eb
N0

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Pb (coherent) Pb (noncoherent)

2M

j
1

FH

1 M )
2(log
M Q
2

2 Eb
N0

3 log2 M 2 Eb
( M 2 1) N0

IK

Federal University of Technology, Minna

604

Resource Sharing Techniques - 1

Digital Communications

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Duplexing (Review Read Section 9.1)


Multiplexing Techniques (self study)

Module 5
Multiplexing & Multiple Access
Resource Sharing Techniques
Duplexing
Multiplexing Techniques
Frequency Division Multiplexing
(FDM)
Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)
Code Division Multiplexing (CDM)
Wavelength Division Multiplexing
(WDM)

What is Multiple Access?


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Multiple Access Techniques


Frequency Division Multiple
Access (FDMA)
Time Division Multiple Access
(TDMA)
Practical TDMA Systems
Code Division Multiple Access
(CDMA)
How CDMA Works
Practical CDMA Systems
Hybrid Multiple Access
Techniques

Federal University of Technology, Minna

605

Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM)


Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)
Code Division Multiplexing (CDM)
Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM)

Multiple Access Techniques


Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA)
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Direct Sequence CDMA

Other Multiple Access Techniques


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

606

Duplexing Techniques - 1

Resource Sharing Techniques - 2


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Since the RF spectrum is a finite and limited resource,


it is necessary to share the available resources
between users

A technique commonly used in many


Terminal
Terminal
radio and telecommunication between a
A
B
pair of users Tx and Rx
Simplex
Simplex
Terminal
Terminal
Info is transmitted in one and only
A
B
one pre-assigned direction
Half-duplex
Half Duplex
Transmission of information in only
Terminal
Terminal
one direction at a time
A
B
Full-duplex
Uses simplex operation both end
Full Duplex
Simultaneous transmission and reception of info in both directions
In general, duplex operation require 2 frequencies
May be achieved by simplex operation of 2 or more simplex at both ends

Digital
input

lm q
i

Forma
t

Source
Encoder

Source
bits

Channel
bits

Channel
Encoder

From other
sources

Multiplex

Modulate

Spread

Multiple
Access

Tx

Pe

Performance
Measure

Bits or
Symbol

Waveforms

Rx

lm q

Format

Source
Decoder

Channel
Decoder

Demultiplex

Digital
output

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Source
bits

Channel
bits

Demodulate
&
Detect

To other
destinations

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Despread

Multiple
Access

Duplexing can be implemented in either Frequency or Time domain


Frequency Division Duplexing (FDD) & Time Division Duplexing (TDD)

Carrier & symbol


synchronization

607

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

608

Duplexing Techniques - 2

Duplexing Techniques - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Frequency Division Duplexing (FDD)


Multiplexes the Tx and Rx in one time slot in which
transmission and reception is on 2 different frequencies
It provides simultaneous transmission channels for
mobile/base station
i.e. each channel has a Forward and a Reverse
frequency
At the base station, separate transmit and receive antennas
are used to accommodate the two separate channels
At the mobile unit, a single antenna (with duplexer) is used
to enable transmission and reception
To facilitate FDD, sufficient frequency isolation of the
transmit and receive frequencies is necessary
FDD is used exclusively in analog mobile radio systems

Time Division Duplexing (TDD)

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

609

Multiplexing Techniques

Amplitude

Multiplexes the Tx & Rx in one frequency at different time slots


Time Division Duplexing

Time

A portion of the time is used to transmit and a portion is used to


receive
TDD is used, for example, in a simple 2-way radio where a button
is pressed to talk and released to listen
If the data rate from the base station >> the end-users data rate,
it is possible to use buffer-and-burst transmission (giving the
appearance of full duplex)
TDD is only possible for digital transmission
Federal University of Technology, Minna

610

Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM)

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Multiplexing (sometimes called channelization) is the process of


simultaneously transmitting several information signals using a
single communication channel
Commonly used to separate different users such that they share the
same resource without interference

In Frequency Division Multiplexing (FDM), the available


bandwidth is divided into non-overlapping frequency slots
Each message is assigned a frequency slot within the available
band
Signals are translated to different frequency band using
modulation and then added together to form a baseband signal
The signals are narrowband and frequency limited

Communication recourses are allocated a priori and allocated resources are


fixed
Only one pair of transceivers are required
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

611

fN-1
fN-2
Frequency

Three major kinds


Frequency Division
Multiplexing
Time Division Multiplexing
Code Division Multiplexing

f3
f2

f1

Frequency Band N

Frequency Band 2

Frequency Band 1

f0
Time

FDM can be used for either digital or analog transmission


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

612

Code Division Multiplexing (CDM)

Time Division Multiplexing (TDM)


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Digitized info from several sources are multiplexed in time and transmitted
over a single communication channel
The communication channel is divided into frames of length Tf
Each frame is further segmented into N subinterval called slots, each with
duration Ts = Tf/N, where N is the number of users

CDM is a multiplexing method


where multiple users are
permitted to transmit
simultaneously on the same
time and same frequency
In CDM system, users time
share a higher-rate digital
channel by overlaying a higherrate digital sequence on their
transmission
Each user is assigned distinct
code sequence (or waveform)
This technique may be viewed
as a combination of FDM and
TDM using some sort of code

...

Slot
N

s1

s2

...

Sync word

sk

Slot
1

Slot
2

Slot
N

...

s1

s2

...

Information or data word


FRAME

Each user is assigned a slot (or channel) within each time frame
TDM is used to combine several low bit rate signals to form a high-rate
signal to be transmitted over a high bit rate medium
Individual message signals need not have the same rate, or same type of
signal since each channel is independent of one another
TDM is usually used for digital communication and cannot be used in analog
communication
Different combining techniques are shown below
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

613

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Frequency

Band 3

Signal 3

Signal 1

Signal 3

Band 2

Signal 2

Signal 3

Signal 2

Band 1

Signal 1

Signal 2

Signal 1

Slot 1

Slot 2

Slot 3

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Department of Communications Engineering

In optics, the process of using laser source, repeater


amplifier, and optical detector to independently
modulated light carriers to be sent over a single fiber is
known as WDM

Definition:
Multiple Access (MA) techniques
are multiplexing protocols that allow
more than a pair of transceivers
to share a common medium
i.e., the simultaneous use of a
channel by more than one user
Allocation of resources
not defined a priori
not necessarily fixed
Each users signal must be kept
uniquely distinguishable from other
users signals, to allow private
communications on demand
Users can be separated many ways:
physically: on separate wires by
arbitrarily defined channels
established in frequency, time, or
any other variable imaginable

This process has been very


difficult until recently
fc of light with sufficient
spectral stability is required
and was not available until
recently

Each individual light carrier could support data rates of up to


10 Gbps with users time multiplexed onto the channel
WDM thus offers the possibility of several hundreds of gigabits
transmission over a single fiber and also bi-direction
transmission over the same fiber
Federal University of Technology, Minna

614

What is Multiple Access?

Wavelength Division Multiplexing (WDM)


Department of Communications Engineering

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Time

Code Division Multiplexing

615

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

616

Multiple Access Techniques


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Multiple Access can be implemented in:


Frequency Division Multiple Access
A users channel is a private frequency uses different frequencies for different users
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)
A users channel is a specific frequency, but
it only belongs to the user during certain
time slots in a repeating sequence
That is, same frequency is used but
different time for different users
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)
Each users signal is a continuous unique
code pattern buried within a shared signal,
mingled with other users code patterns
If a users code pattern is known, the
presence or absence of their signal can be
detected, thus conveying information
Uses same frequencies and time but
different codes (3G wireless systems)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Space Division Multiple Access (SDMA)


Uses spot beam antennas to separate radio signals by
pointing at different users with different spot beam, e.g.,
ACTS
Demand Access Multiple
Multiple Access Protocol

Contentionless
(Scheduling Access)

Contention
(Random Access)
CDMA

617

Fixed
Assigned

Demand
Assigned

Repeated Random
Access

Random Access
w/reservation

FDMA
TDMA

Polling
Token Passing

ALOHA
Slotted ALOHA

Implicit
Explicit

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Access (DAMA)
Uses dynamic
assignment protocol
(allocates resources on
request)
Random Access Multiple
Access (RAMA)
Hybrid Multiple
Accesses

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Time Division CDMA, Time


Division Frequency
Hopping, FDMA/CDMA,
etc.
618

FDMA - 2

FDMA - 1
Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

FDMA is the oldest and most familiar method of radio


communication

Distant users are far enough that they cause no interference


When the call is finished, the channel is released and available for a
new call
If the transmission path deteriorates, the controller switches the
system to another channel
FDMA is the method used in the original cellular systems
AMPS Advanced Mobile Phone System
Although technically simple to implement, FDMA is wasteful of BW
Channel is assigned to a single conversation whether or not
somebody is speaking
It cannot handle alternate forms of data, only voice is permissible
Used extensively in the early telephone and wireless multi-user
communication systems
FDMA is the most commonly used access protocol especially for
satellite communication

used since 1890 in broadcasting, two-way radio, and


cellular systems

Individual frequencies (private frequencies) are


assigned to individual users on demand for the
duration of their call
Guard band (at the edges & between) to
minimize crosstalk

B
FRAME

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

619

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

620

FDMA - 3

FDMA - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

In a cluster, each user is assigned a portion of the


available bandwidth
Channel
1

Channel
2

MHz

Bs

Let
Ndata = number of data channel
Nctl = number of control channel
Total Bandwidth
Bs N data Bc N ctl Bc 2 Bg

N s , or N N data N ctl

N Ns

N data Bc Bs

Bs 2 Bg

Federal University of Technology, Minna

621

N ch / cluster
t number of calls per hour
N

Prof. Okey Ugweje

N user

number of calls/hour/cell
average # of calls/user/hour

BW available for data transmission N data Bc

1
Bs
sytem bandwidth
N data / cluster
# of data channel/cluster

chls/MHz/km 2
Bs N Acell
sytem BW Acluster
Guard Bands

Bg

Bs
N s Bc Bg

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Channel
1

622

Department of Communications Engineering

FDMA

FDMA Capacity

Federal University of Technology, Minna

TDMA - 1

FDMA - 5
Department of Communications Engineering

Average number of
users per hour per cell
Spectral Efficiency

N data / cell

Number of calls per hour per cell (where t is the trunk


efficiency)

N calls

Bc

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Bs 2 Bg

N data / cluster
N
We can also determine the # of control channels per cluster of
cell in a similar manner

Number of data channels/cell

Bs N s Bc 2 Bg

Number of Channels

N ch / cluster

Bc
N
Number of channels/cell
N ch / cell ch / cluster
N
Number of data channels/cluster N data / cluster N ch / cluster N ctl / cluster

Channel
Ns

......

Bc

Bg

Number of channels/cluster

Channel
2

......

Bc
Bs

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Channel
Ns

MHz
623

In TDMA, each user has a specific


frequency but only during an
assigned time slot
The freq is used by other users
during other time slots
Available time is divided into frames
of equal duration
In each time slot, only one user is allowed to either transmit or
receive
Number of time slots/ frame is a design parameter depending
on requirements (e.g., modulation, bandwidth, data rate, etc.)
In TDMA, bitstream are broken into frames, frames broken into
slots and slots are assigned to users
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

624

TDMA - 2

TDMA - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

One TDMA Frame

TDMA/FDD

Control Bits

Information Data

Slot 1 Slot 2 Slot 3

Also see Fig. 9.4

Trail Bits

Sync. Bits

Illustration of TDMA Transmission

Trail Bits

Slot N

Information Data

Guard Bits

Forward and Reverse channels are duplexed within time domain (TDD) or
frequency domain (FDD)
Slots contain data, error check, guard, synchronization training, and control
bits
TDMA transmits data in a buffer-and-burst technique and hence
transmission is not continuous
low battery consumption is achieved, and simplification of handoff
process is achievable
Transmission from users are interlaced into cyclic time structure
TDMA requires very high data rate compared to FDMA and hence
equalization is not required
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

625

Each earth station


is assigned a time
slot in a repetitive
time frame
Over the length
of the time slotthe earth station
occupies the
entire bandwidth
of the
transponder

Prof. Okey Ugweje

TDMA - 4

Federal University of Technology, Minna

626

TDMA - 5

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

TDMA Operation

TDMA Systems
TDMA can operate in wideband or narrowband
Wideband TDMA (W-TDMA)
entire freq spectrum is available to any individual user

Narrowband TDMA (N-TDMA)


total available freq spectrum is divided into subbands, with each
subband operating as a TDMA system
A user only uses the allocated subband
Both frequency and time are partitioned

Basic Frame Structure


Let
Bs = Bt = total spectrum allocation
Bg = guard band
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

627

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

628

TDMA - 6

TDMA - 7

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Bc = Channel bandwidth of individual user


N = frequency reuse factor
Nu = number of subbands
Ld = number of information data symbols in
each slot
Ls, = the total number of symbols in each slot

Nslot = m in your textbook


N s N u N slot
for W-TDMA
1,

N u Bs 2 Bg
, for N-TDMA
B
c

Tf

Preamble

T1

T2

......

(N-1)slot

Nslot
TNslot

sec

N cell

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

N u N slot
N
N N slot
u
sf N

N cell

Trailer

629

Prof. Okey Ugweje

For voice communication with talk spurt


(on) state and silence (off) state

Federal University of Technology, Minna

TDMA - 8

630

TDMA - 9

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Overhead bits per frame

Total number of bits per frame b bT b0 H

bOH N r br N t bp N t bg N r bg

Information bit burst rate, Rb+ Rb

where

bOH =overhead bits per frame


Nr = # of reference burst per frame
br = # of overhead bits per frame
bp = # of overhead bits per preamble in each time slot
bg = # of equivalent bits in each guard time interval

Spectral Efficiency of TDMA


Tf


Tf

Total number of traffic bits per frame


bT T f R

where R = channel bit rate

Prof. Okey Ugweje

100%

Federal University of Technology, Minna

p t
Tf
p t
Tf

Ld
,
Ls

Ld Bs 2 Bg
, for N-TDMA

Ls
Bs

for W-TDMA

TDMA Capacity

Frame efficiency
b
f 1 OH
bT

T frame
Rb
Tslot

631

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Ttraffic
T
R
f frame f b
Tslot
Tslot
Rb
Federal University of Technology, Minna

632

TDMA - 10

TDMA - 11

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Advantages:
No inter-modulation impairment
Since TDMA uses one carrier at a time
No interference from other simultaneous transmissions
TDMAs technology separates users in time ensuring that they will not
experience interference from other simultaneous transmissions
Flexibility
TDMA can be easily adapted for the transmission of data or voice
Variable rates
TDMA offers the ability to carry data rates of 64 kbps to 120 Mbps
(expandable in multiples of 64 kbps)
This enables operators to offer PCS (fax, voice-band data, and SMS,
etc.), as well as bandwidth-intensive applications multimedia and
videoconferencing
Bandwidth efficient protocol
TDMA uses bandwidth more effectively because no frequency guard
bands are required between channels
Low power consumption
since transmission is bursty and non-continuous

i.e, TDMA provides the user with extended battery life and talk time since
the mobile is only transmitting a portion of the time (from 1/3 to 1/10)
during conversations
Guard time between time slots may be used to accommodate
clock instability
delay spread
transmission (or propagation) delays and pulse spreading

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Achieves selectivity in time domain, and selectivity is simpler than FDMA


TDMA devices can be mass produced by VLSI giving rise to low cost
TDMA offers the possibility of a frame monitoring of signal strength (or BER)
to enable better handoff strategies
Ideal for digital communications
TDMA is also the most cost-effective technology for upgrading a current
AMPS analog system to digital

633

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Practical TDMA Systems

TDMA - 12
Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Ideal for satellite on-board processing


TDMA is the only technology that offers an efficient utilization of hierarchical cell
structures offering pico-, micro-, and macro-cells
Hierarchical cell structures allow coverage for the system to be tailored to support
specific traffic and service needs
By using this approach, system capacities of more than 40-times AMPS can be
achieved in a cost-efficient way
Because of its inherent compatibility with FDMA analog systems, TDMA allows
service compatibility with the use of dual-mode handsets

IS-54 and IS-136 (TDMA)

Disadvantage
In TDMA, each user has a predefined time slot. However, users roaming
from one cell to another are not allotted a time slot
Thus, if all the time slots in the next cell are already occupied, a call
might well be disconnected
Likewise, if all the time slots in the cell in which a user happens to be in are
already occupied, a user will not receive a dial tone
TDMA is subjected to multipath distortion because of its sensitivity to timing
Even at thousandths of seconds, these multipath signals cause problems
Overall TDMA is more complex and costly compared to FDMA
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

634

635

IS-54: The original TDMA format, intended for use


within existing AMPS systems
These systems use TDMA by dividing a 30-kHz channel into 3 time
slots, enabling 3 different users to occupy it at same time
IS-54 provides a 3-fold increase in traffic capacity relative to AMPS,
given the same bandwidth allocation
This effectively triples the capacity of the system (freq reuse)
A second phase of the IS-54 standard provides for 6 (instead of 3)
TDMA user channels in each 30 kHz radio channel

IS-136: Enhanced TDMA with special control channels to


allow short message service, battery life extension, other
features 6 timeslots, three users occupy in rotation

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

636

CDMA
Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

GSM (Groupe Special Mobile)

Each users signal is a continuous unique code pattern


buried within a shared signal, mingled with other users
code patterns
If a users code pattern is known, the presence or absence
of their signal can be detected, thus conveying information
All CDMA users occupy same frequency at the same time!
Time and frequency are not used as discriminators
CDMA operates by using coding to discriminate between
users - instead of using freq or time slots
Each user is assigned a unique PN code sequence

GSM standard was developed as a Pan-European


digital cellular standard to replace six incompatible
analog cellular systems then in use in different
geographic areas
GSM standard is similar to IS-54, employing TDMA, but
with 8 timeslots (7 or 8 users occupy in rotation), and
with RF carriers spaced 200 kHz apart

Japanese Digital Cellular


Please note that TDMA is well understood, commonly
employed, and is an efficient media access technique
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

637

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

638

How CDMA Works An Analogy


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

The assigned code is uncorrelated with the data


Because the signals are distinguished by digital codes,
many users can share the same bandwidth simultaneously
i.e., signals transmitted in same frequency & same time
The PN code used for spreading must have
low cross-correlation values and
be unique to every user
Each user is a small voice in a roaring crowd - but with a
uniquely recoverable code
CDMA technology focuses primarily on the DSSS
technique

4 speakers are simultaneously giving presentation, each


with different language -- Arabic, Chinese, English & Hindu
Chinese

Principles

English

OF
CDMA
Arabic

English
Major

Hindu

You are in the audience, and English is your native language


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

639

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

640

Characteristic of DS/CDMA

How CDMA Works


Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

You only understand the words of the English speaker


and tune out the Arabic, Chinese, and Hindu speakers
You hear only what you know and recognize

This is the general idea of CDMA systems


Multiple users share the same frequency band at the
same time, yet each user can only recognize his or her
own code
This technique allows numerous phone calls to be
simultaneously transmitted in one radio frequency band
Coded conversations are encoded/decoded for each user

A signal correlated with a given PN code and


decorrelated with the same PN code returns the original
signal
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

641

Universal Frequency Reuse


Uses one universal cell frequency reuse pattern
improves the capacity of the system
Ease of freq management is also found in
DS/CDMA
Power Control
Reverse Link (from mobile unit to base station)
link is designed to be asynchronous and is
susceptible to the near-far problem
In order to remedy this, the use of power control is
employed
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Characteristic of DS/CDMA

Federal University of Technology, Minna

642

In Summary

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Effective use of the power control will ensure that


power control must be accurate and fast enough to
compensate for fading
Forward Link (from base station to mobile unit)
Link does not suffer much from near-far problem
since all cell signals can be received at the mobile
with equal power
When at excessive intercell interference, the power
control can be applied by increasing the power to the
mobile

1. In CDMA, a signal is spread into a larger freq band


than is needed to represent it - the redundancy gives
error resilience, and the wideband frequency combats
multipath effects because of frequency diversity
2.Cell-reuse patterns are no longer strictly necessary
3.CDMA is described as having a universal one-cell
reuse pattern

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

643

Federal University of Technology, Minna

644

Advantages of CDMA

Advantages of CDMA

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

1.Voice Activities Cycles


CDMA is the only technique that succeeds in taking
advantage of the nature of human conversation
In CDMA, all the users are sharing one radio channel
The human voice activity cycle is 35%, the rest of the time
we are listening
Because each channel user is active just 35% of the entire
cycle, all others benefit with less interference in a single
CDMA radio channel
2.Improved call quality, with better and more consistent sound
as compared to other systems
3.No Equalizer Needed
When the transmission rate is much higher than 10 kbps in
both FDMA and TDMA, an equalizer is required
On the other hand, CDMA only needs a correlator, which is
cheaper than the equalizer
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

4.No Hard Handoff


In CDMA, every cell uses the same radio
This feature avoids the process of handoff from one freq to another while
moving from one cell to another
5.No Guard Time in CDMA
TDMA requires the use of guard time between time slots
guard time does occupy the time interval for some info bits
This waste of bits does not exists in CDMA, because guard time is not
needed in CDMA technique
6.Less Fading
Less fading is observed in the wide-band signal while propagating in a
mobile ratio environment
7.Capacity Advantage
Given correct parameters, CDMA can have as much as four times the
TDMA capacity; and twenty times FDMA capacity per channel/cell
8.No frequency management or assignment needed
In both, TDMA and FDMA, the frequency management is always a critical
Since there is only one channel in CDMA, no frequency management is
needed
645

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Advantages of CDMA

Federal University of Technology, Minna

646

Disadvantages of CDMA

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

9.Enhanced privacy
CDMA signals resistant to interception or jamming
10.Soft Capacity
Because in CDMA all the traffic channels share a single radio channel,
we can add one additional user so the voice quality is just slightly
degraded
11.Coexistence
Both systems, analog and CDMA can operate in two different spectra,
with no interference at all
12.Simplified system planning through the use of the same frequency in
every sector of every cell
Improved coverage characteristics, allowing for the possibility of fewer
cell sites
13.Increased talk time for portables
14.Bandwidth on demand

1. Capacity not well defined


The capacity of CDMA systems is not well defined. The
effective (Eb/No) formula demonstrates the interferencelimited nature of the system, but more than one factor in that
formula is affected by the number of users, making it hard to
gauge how performance degrades as a function of users

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

647

2. The Near-Far Problem


Effect is present when an
interfering Tx is much closer
to Rx than the intended Tx
Assume there are 2 users,
one near the base and one
far from the base as shown
CDMA interference comes
mainly from nearby users
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Near-Far effect illustrated

Federal University of Technology, Minna

648

Disadvantages of CDMA

Practical CDMA Systems

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Although the cross-correlation between codes A and B is low, the correlation between
the received signal from the interfering Rx and code A can be higher than the
correlation between the received signal from the intended Rx and code A
In CDMA, stronger received signal levels raise the noise floor at the base station
demodulators for the weaker signals, thereby decreasing the probability that weaker
signals will be received
The result is that proper data detection is not possible

IS-95 (cdmaOne)

To help eliminate the Near-Far effect, power control is used


Base Station (BS) rapidly samples the signal strength of each mobile and
then sends a power change command over the forward link
This sampling is done 800 times per second and can be adjusted in 84
steps of 1 dB
The purpose of this is so that the received powers from all users are roughly
equal
That is, when a mobile unit is close to a BS, its power output is lower
the mobile unit transmits only at the power necessary to maintain
connection
This solves the problem of a nearby subscriber overpowering the BS receiver
and drowning out the signals of far away subscribers
An extra benefit of power control is extended battery life
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

649

After the development of the IS-54 standard,


Qualcomm, a San Diego-based company, developed a
new digital cellular system design utilizing Code Division
Multiple Access (CDMA)
This is known as IS-95
Unlike IS-54, which utilizes the same 30-kHz (same as
AMPS), IS-95 uses a SS signal with 1.2288 MHz
spreading bandwidth
a frequency span equivalent to 41 AMPS channels

IS-95 has been shown to theoretically offer greater


traffic capacity than TDMA

CDMA2000
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

CDMA Performance - 1

CDMA Performance - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

CDMA System Analysis

CDMA Transmitter
Data signal
dk(t)

Users are identified by unique code sequence


Let

t iTb
d k t ski
ski PTb t iTb
i
Tb i

ak(t)dk(t)

Baseband
BPF

Modulator

Transmitted Signal
xk(t)

PN Code
Generator

Acos ct

Chip Clock

First the data symbols dk(t) are spread into ak(t)dk(t)


Then spread signal is modulated (usually by PSK)
T
Notice that f 1
T NT N b
c

t lTc
ak t akl
akl PTc t lTc
l
Tc l

Tc

Tc

N=PG = Gp = number of chips per data symbol = processing gain


Hence, resulting spread spectrum signal can be written as

Please note that ak(t) and dk(t) are completely independent


Federal University of Technology, Minna

ak(t)

K = number of users
dk = kth users baseband data sequence with amplitude 1
ak = kth users spreading code sequence with amplitude 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

650

651

t iTb lTc
sk (t ) Ac ski akl
cos 2 f c t
Tc
l

i
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

652

CDMA Performance - 3

CDMA Performance - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

yk (t ) h s t k d

where fc = carrier frequency, = carrier phase

We can simplify the expression above and use


sk (t ) 2 Pk ak t d k t cos 2 f c t k
2E
where Pk b , Pk = k-th user power
Tb

2 Pk kl ak t - k d k t - k cos c t k t - kl e j kl d
L

l 1
L

2 Pk kl ak t - kl d k t - kl cos c t kl

2E
or Pk s
Ts

l 1

where

kl k kl c kl Asynchronism
Let L be the number of resolvable paths which is
assumed to satisfy the condition

The Channel Model

T
L m 1
Tc

hk (t ) kl t kl e j kl
L

channel output is

Tm = maximum delay spread


Tc = chip period

l 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

653

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

CDMA Performance - 5

CDMA Performance - 6

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

CDMA Receiver

CDMA system model (k-th user)

Signal is first demodulated and then despread


The signal is despread by the same amount through a
cross-correlation by locally generated PN sequence
i.e., demodulation accomplished by remodulating w/spreading
code
involves correlation of the received signal with the delayed
version of the spreading signal (despreading operation)
In other words, the received signal is multiplied again by a
synchronized version of the PN code

Channel

Transmitter

dk t

ak t

Acos (c t+ k )

n (t)

PN signal
Generator

r(t)

T
X

()dt

a k (t-)

rt

s kl (t)

Acos (c t+ k )
Receiver

Demodulator

y t

2 Pk cos ( c t k )
Prof. Okey Ugweje

654

T
0 b dt

Decision
Device

skl

Notice that the despreading operation is similar to the


spreading operation

ak (t Td )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

655

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

656

CDMA Performance - 7

CDMA Performance - 8

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

CDMA system model (K active users)


d1 (t)

a1 (t) cos (c t+1 )

( i 1)Tb

z1 iT

n( t )

d K (t)

a K (t) cos (c t+ K )

Assuming user #1 is our reference user.

+
n( t )

r (t )

T
X

()dt

Assume that bit zero is transmitted and is being detected


(i.e., i = 0)

sk (t)

z1 0 b r t a1 t cos 2 f c t dt

a (t-)

A c cos (c t+ k )

Substituting
K

z1i 2 Pk kl 0 b ak t - kl a1 t d k t - kl cos c t cos c t kl

Using a simplified diagram, can determine the received signal

k 1 l 1

rk (t ) yk t n(t )

0 b n t a1 t cos c t dt

k 1
K

r t a1 t cos 2 f c t dt

2 Pk kl ak t - kl d k t - kl cos 2 f c t kl n(t )
k 1 l 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

657

658

Department of Communications Engineering

Spread Spectrum (SS) is a modulation technique where the


bandwidth of the transmitted signal is made to be greater than
the Bmin required for transmission
The data is scattered (spread) across the available frequency
band in a pseudo random pattern
The idea behind SS is to transform a signal with bandwidth B
into a noise-like signal of much larger bandwidth Bss

Module 6
Spread Spectrum (SS)
What is Spread Spectrum?
Significance of Spreading
Basic Characteristics of SS System
Classifications/ Benefits/Applications of Spread Spectrum
Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum
Summary of Direct Sequence Techniques
Frequency Hopped Spread Spectrum
Direct Sequence vs. Frequency Hopping

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

What is Spread Spectrum? - 1

Digital Communication System


Department of Communications Engineering

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

659

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

660

What is Spread Spectrum? - 2

What is Spread Spectrum? - 3

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Spreading Action
At the transmitter, the baseband signal m(t), is usually
spread by a pseudo-noise (PN) code sequence p(t)
Spreading is achieved by modulating the original
signal with a pseudo-random code sequence p(t)
The code sequence p(t) is independent of the data
sequence m(t)

In Spreading the signal


The original signal is embedded in noise (see fig.)
Power of spread signal = Power of original signal
Total power is the area under the spectral density
curve (see fig.)
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

661

What is Spread Spectrum? - 4

signals with equivalent total power may have


either a large signal power concentrated in a
small area or a small signal power spread over a
large area
Typically, power of SS signal is spread between
10-30 dB
i.e., power is spread over 10-1000 times original
power
Make signal resistant to noise, interference, and
snooping
Increases the probability of correct reception
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Significance of Spreading - 1

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Despreading
At the receiver, the received signal r(t) is despread by the
same amount

Processing gain (PG or Gp) or spreading factor is


defined as
PG G p

by cross-correlating r(t) by a locally generated version of the PN


sequence p(t)

Cross-correlating with the correct sequence recovers the


original data
Is evident from Shannon's capacity equation

C B log 2 1
N

C = channel capacity in bits


B = bandwidth in hertz
S = signal power
N = noise power

Federal University of Technology, Minna

B
Spread Bandwidth
ss
Information Bandwidth B

Gp is the improvement gained by spreading the BW


Gp determines the # of users that can be allowed in a system
Gp determines the amount of multipath effect reduction
Gp determines the difficulty of jamming or detecting a signal
Gp may be viewed as performance increase achieved by
spreading
It can be used to describe the signal fidelity gained at the
cost of bandwidth expansion

Observe the effect of increasing the bandwidth B


If B is increased, we may decrease SNR without decreasing
capacity
Prof. Okey Ugweje

662

663

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

664

Significance of Spreading - 2

Basic Characteristics of SS System

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

It is through Gp that increased system performance


is achieved without requiring a high SNR
Gp (# of chips per data symbol ) can also be written
as
T R
B
G s c ss
p T
R
Rs
2
s
c

For SS systems, it is advantageous to have Gp as


high as possible

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

665

Classifications of Spread Spectrum - 1

Carrier is unpredictable (pseudo-random noise) and


is wideband
BW of the transmitted signal must be greater then the
BW of the data signal
BW of transmitted signal must be determined by some
function that is independent of the message and is
known to the receiver
Despreading involves cross correlation of the received
signal with a synchronously generated replica of the
wideband carrier

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

666

Classifications of Spread Spectrum - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DS-SS)


Signal is modulated a 2nd (or 1st) time using a
wideband spreading signal/code
Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum (FH-SS)
fc is randomly switched from one band to another
during radio transmission according to some specified
algorithm
Time Hopping Spread Spectrum (TH-SS)
The signal hope within a particular time frame
Only one time slot in a frame is modulated
Multi-Carrier Spread Spectrum (MC-SS)
Different carriers are used to transmit the signal

Hybrid Forms of Spread Spectrum


These techniques implement SS in different ways, but
implementations requires:
Signal spreading by means of a code
Synchronization between pairs of users is required
Ensure that some signals do not overwhelm others
(power control)
Uses source and channel coding to optimize
performance
Direct Sequence and Frequency Hopping techniques
are the two most popular SS techniques

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

667

Federal University of Technology, Minna

668

Benefits and Applications of SS - 1

Benefits and Applications of SS - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Anti-jam (AJ) capability (especially narrow-band (NB)


jamming)
AJ capability is due to the unpredictable nature of the carrier
signal
Since NB interference affects only a small portion of the
spectrum, it is difficult to jam the entire spectrum
Because of the difficulty to jam or detect SS signals, the first
applications were in the military
Covert operation or low probability of intercept (LPI)
LPI can be achieved with high Gp and unpredictable fc
When power is spread thinly and uniformly in freq domain,
detection by surveillance receiver is difficult

Multiple-access capability
SS systems are used for random and multiple
access systems
Users can start their transmission at an arbitrary
time without worrying about channel saturation
Multipath protection
SS implies a reduction of multipath effects, hence a
reduction in fading
i.e., high time resolution is attained by the correlation
detection of wide-band signals

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

669

Benefits and Applications of SS - 3

Federal University of Technology, Minna

670

Benefits and Applications of SS - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Secure communications
SS systems achieves privacy due to unknown
random codes
Since code is unknown to a hostile user,
detection is difficult
Cryptographic capabilities result when the data
cannot be distinguished from the carrier to an
unauthorized observer
In this case, SS carrier is like a key in a cipher
system
A system using indistinguishable data and SS
carrier modulation is a form of privacy system

Low power spectral density (PSD)


Spreading over a large frequency-band reduces the
PSD, while Gaussian Noise level increases
This improved the spectral efficiency in some
special circumstances
Interference limited operation
Performance is limited by interference rather than
noise
Transmitter-receiver pairs using independent
random carriers can operate in the same BW with
minimal co-channel interference

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

671

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

672

Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum - 1

Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Definition:
K = number of users, k = 1, 2, , K
m(t) = user data signal with bit duration, Tb
p(t) = spreading code sequence (pulse or symbol of the PN
code) or chip with duration Tc
Note that Tc << Tb

DS-SS Transmitter
Narrowband
Data In

DS-SS
Modulation

Multipath
Channel

Narrowband
Data Out

m(t)
Spreading
Process

Data Bits
m(t)

Both m(t) and p(t) has amplitude 1 (anti-podal or polar)


In DS-SS, m(t) is directly multiplied by p(t)
B= bandwidth of data signal m(t)
Bss = bandwidth of spread signal s(t)

Spreading
Process

Data Bits
m(t)

Tb

+1

Spread Signal
s(t)

Code Sequence, p(t)

each Tb is coded into a spreading sequence of Gp chip durations

-1
p(t)
+1

Spread Signal
s(t)

chip

-1

PN Code Sequence
p(t)

1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 0 1 0
m(t) x p(t)
+1

Note that Bss >> B

Gp

Please note that m(t) and p(t) are completely independent


Prof. Okey Ugweje

Diversity
Receiver

Federal University of Technology, Minna

673

Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum - 3

Tb Rc Bss

Tc Rb 2 Rb

Prof. Okey Ugweje

-1
1 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 1 1 0 0

Federal University of Technology, Minna

674

Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

For example in IS-95, we have

Each Tb is coded into a sequence of Gp chips


T
Gp b
Tc

m(t)
-V

+1

Bandwidth Expansion Factor

Tc

0 0

m(t) x p(t)
1

1 0

Code Length

+V

-V

Federal University of Technology, Minna

Baseband
BPF

Sss(t)

Transmitted
Signal

PN Code
Generator

IS-95

LO @ fc

Chip Clock

T 12288
106
.
Gp b =
Tc
9.6x103
128

Tc

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Message

Processing Gain

chip

p(t)

-1

This increases the rate by a factor of Gp


Each binary chip can change with probability 0.5 in Tc sec.

Tb

+V

First the data symbols m(t) are spread into p(t)m(t)


Then spread signal is modulated (usually by MPSK)
We must have

Tb
Gp

sss (t )

675

Prof. Okey Ugweje

2 Es
m(t ) p (t ) cos 2 f c t
Ts

Tb G pTc
f c

Federal University of Technology, Minna

1
;
Tc

Tb
Tc
676

Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum - 5

Summary of Direct Sequence Techniques

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

DS-SS Receiver

fc of DS is fixed, but m(t) is spread out into a much larger BW (at


least 10 times) by using PN code sequence
Both m(t) and Sss(t) signal use same amount of transmit power
However, the PSD of Sss(t) is much lower than that of m(t)
As a result, it is more difficult to detect the presence of
Sss(t)
In this case, the power density of m(t) is 10 times higher
than Sss(t), assuming the spreading ratio is 10
If there is an interference or jammer in the same band, it will be
spread out during the spreading operation
Hence, its impact is greatly reduced
i.e, the offending jammer's power is reduced by at least 90%
At the Rx the spread signal Sss(t), is despread in a similar
manner to recover m(t)

r(t) is first demodulated and then despread


Demodulation is accomplished in part by re-modulation
with a PN spreading (coherent detection)
The correlation of r(t) with the delayed version of the p(t)
(despreading operation)
rt
Demodulator

y t

2 P cos (c t )

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Tb

0 dt

Decision
Device

p(t Td )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

677

Frequency Hopped Spread Spectrum - 1

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

678

Frequency Hopped Spread Spectrum - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

FH is the repeated switching of fc from one band to


another during transmission
Radio signal hops from one fc to another at a specific
hopping rate and sequence that appears to be random
(see animated)

Typically, each fc is chosen from a set of 2k frequencies


spaced Tb
The # of discrete frequency determines the BW of the
system
Gp is directly dependent on # of available freq choices for
a data rate
PN code does not directly modulate the data, but is used
to control the hopping sequence of fc

The fi(t) output of the Tx


jumps from one value to
another based on the
pseudo-random input
from the code generator

m(t )

Overall BW required for FH is much wider than that required to


transmit the same info using only one fc
Each fc and its associated sidebands must stay within a defined BW
Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

679

p( t )
2 P cos( c t )

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

680

Frequency Hopped Spread Spectrum - 3

Frequency Hopped Spread Spectrum - 4

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Minimum time required to change the frequency is


dependent on
the chip rate
the amount of redundancy used,
the distance to the nearest interference source

To successfully jam a hopper, either the entire band


must be saturated with noise or jamming source must
be able to track the hopping sequence
Neither of these scenarios is likely to occur
naturally, and they are quite difficult to achieve
intentionally
FH-SS enjoys jamming & multipath immunity, as in
DS-SS
If data cannot be received on a particular channel due
to fading, hopper moves to an unfaded channel and
retransmits the data
FH is less effected by the Near-Far problem

Other FH transmitters will be


using different patterns, which
usually will be on non-interfering
freqs
At Rx, FH is removed by mixing
with a local oscillator signal
which is hopping synchronously
with received signal
Prof. Okey Ugweje

r (t )

Federal University of Technology, Minna

m t

681

Frequency Hopped Spread Spectrum - 5

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

682

Frequency Hopped Spread Spectrum - 6

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

FH sequences have only a limited number of hits


with each other
This means that if a near interferer is present, only
a number of frequency-hops will be blocked
instead of the whole signal
Usually FH is accomplished by multiple frequency
code selected FSK
Obtaining a high Gp is hard because of the
requirement that a frequency synthesizer be able
perform fast-hopping over fc
The faster the hopping-rate the higher the Gp

FH may be classified as either fast or slow


Slow FH is when the hopping rate is less than the
data rate
single hop per symbol bit
Fast FH is the converse
multiple hops per symbol bit
Hopping sequence is designed for allowing
orthogonality in cells and
minimum correlation with respect to intercell
interference
The motivation and advantages of FH is similar to that
of DS system

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

683

Federal University of Technology, Minna

684

Direct Sequence vs. Frequency Hopping - 1

Direct Sequence vs. Frequency Hopping - 2

Department of Communications Engineering

Department of Communications Engineering

Processing Gain
FH does not spread the signal no processing gain from spreading
Power Usage
FH requires more power to achieve same SNR compared to DS
Synchronization
Communication in FH is more difficult to synchronize compared to the DS
since both time and fc need to be in tune
In DS, only the timing of the chips needs to be synchronized since the
carrier fc is fixed
Latency Time
FH spend more time to search the signal to lock to it (longer latency time)
DS radio can lock-in the chip sequence in just a few bits
Usually, to make the initial synchronization possible, the hopper will park
at a fixed fc before hopping. If the jammer happens to locate at the same fc
as the parking fc, the hopper will not be able to hop at all!
And once it hops, it will be very difficult, if not impossible to re-synchronize
if the Rx ever lost sync

Complexity and Cost


FH is usually more costly and more complicated than the DS because it
needs extra circuits for hopping and synchronizing
Performance in Multipath
FH performs better than DS in multipath fading environment
FH does not stay at the same fc and a null at one fc is usually not a null
at other fc (survives multipath environment better)
Capacity
FH can usually carry more data than the DS since FH is completely
narrowband at all times
Interference Rejection Capability
FH reduces its impact by avoiding the jammer and DS reduces its impact
by spreading or diluting the effect of the jammer (net effect is the same)
Application
Hence FH is more popular for voice than data communication because of
their higher error tolerance

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Federal University of Technology, Minna

685

Direct Sequence vs. Frequency Hopping - 3


Department of Communications Engineering

Potable Comparison
Direct Sequence
Easy and Simple
Use Lower Power
Short Latency Time
Quick Lock-In
Short Indoor Range
Low Data Rate

Prof. Okey Ugweje

Frequency Hopper
Complicated
Use Higher Power
Long Latency Time
Slow Lock-In
Long Indoor Range
High Data Rate
Better for multipath channel
Less susceptible to
jamming

Federal University of Technology, Minna

687

Federal University of Technology, Minna

686

Potrebbero piacerti anche